CEAM018100

CEAM018100
Operation & Maintenance

Manual
DUMP TRUCK
SERIAL NUMBERS A30427 & UP
®
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance per-
sonnel must read and understand this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept in or near the machine for reference, and periodically reviewed by all
personnel who will come into contact with it.
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp (KAC), and is not to be reproduced, used, or dis-
closed except in accordance with written authorization from KAC.
It is the policy of the Company to improve products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. The
Company reserves the right to make changes or add improvements at any time without incurring any obli-
gation to install such changes on products sold previously.
Because of continuous research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication.
Customers should contact their local Komatsu distributor for information on the latest revision.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
NON-OEM PARTS IN CRITICAL SYSTEMS
For safety reasons, Komatsu America Corp. strongly recommends against the use
of non-OEM replacement parts in critical systems of all Komatsu equipment. Critical
systems include but are not limited to steering, braking and operator safety sys-
tems.
Replacement parts manufactured and supplied by unauthorized sources may not be

designed, manufactured or assembled to Komatsu's design specifications; accord-
ingly, use of such parts may compromise the safe operation of Komatsu products
and place the operator and others in danger should the part fail.
Komatsu is also aware of repair companies that will rework or modify an OEM part
for reuse in critical systems. Komatsu does not generally authorize such repairs or
modifications for the same reasons as noted above.
Use of non-OEM parts places full responsibility for the safe performance of the
Komatsu product on the supplier and user. Komatsu will not in any case accept
responsibility for the failure or performance of non-OEM parts in its products,
including any damages or personal injury resulting from such use.
EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY
EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT (APPLIES TO CANADA ONLY)
1. Products Warranted
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. and Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectively “Komatsu”) produce and/or
market products under brand names of Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak and Galion. This emissions warranty applies to new engines bearing the
Komatsu name installed in these products and used in Canada in machines designed for industrial off-highway use. This warranty applies only to
these engines produced on or after January 1, 2000. This warranty will be administered by Komatsu distribution in Canada.
2. Coverage
Komatsu warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the
time of sale by Komatsu, with all U.S. Federal emission regulations applicable at the time of manufacture and that it is free from defects in
workmanship or material which would cause it not to meet these regulations within five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, as
measured from the date of delivery of the engine to the ultimate purchaser.
3. Limitations
Failures, other than those resulting from defects in materials or workmanship, are not covered by this warranty. Komatsu is not responsible for
failures or damage resulting from what Komatsu determines to be abuse or neglect, including, but not limited to: operation without adequate coolant
or lubricants; over fueling; over speeding; lack of maintenance of lubricating, cooling or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in
or shutdown practices; unauthorized modifications of the engine. Komatsu is also not responsible for failures caused by incorrect fuel or by water,
dirt or other contaminants in the fuel. Komatsu is not responsible for non-engine repairs, “downtime” expense, related damage, fines, all business
costs or other losses resulting from a warrantable failure.
KOMATSU IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This warranty, together with the express commercial warranties, are the sole warranties of Komatsu. THERE ARE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICUALR PURPOSE.
GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS
ÉNONCÉ DE GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS (APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT):
1. Produits garantis:
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. et Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectivement Komatsu) produisent et/ou font la
mise en marché de produits portant les noms de marque Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak et Galion. Cette garantie sur les émissions s’applique à tous les
nouveaux moteurs portant le nom Komatsu, installés dans ces produits et utilisés au Canada dans des machines conçues pour utilisation industrielle non-
routière. Cette garantie s’applique seulement sur les moteurs produits à partir du 1er Janvier 2000. Cette garantie sera administrée par la distribution de
Komatsu au Canada .
2. Couverture:
Komatsu garantit à l’acheteur ultime et chaque acheteur subséquent que le moteur est conçu, construit et équipé en toute conformité, au moment de la vente
par Komatsu, avec toutes les Réglementations fédérales américaines sur les émissions applicables au moment de la fabrication et qu’il est exempt de défauts
de construction ou de matériaux qui auraient pour effet de contrevenir à ces réglementations en dedans de 5 ans ou 3000 heures d’opération, mesuré à partir
de la date de livraison du moteur au client ultime.
3. Limitations:
Les bris, autres que ceux résultant de défauts de matériaux ou de construction, ne sont pas couverts par cette Garantie. Komatsu n’est pas responsable pour
bris ou dommages résultant de ce que Komatsu détermine comme étant de l’abus ou négligence, incluant mais ne se limitant pas à: l’opération sans
lubrifiants ou agent refroidissants adéquats; la suralimentation d’essence; la survitesse; le manque d’entretien des systèmes de lubrification, de
refroidissement ou d’entrée; de pratiques non-propices d’entreposage, de mise en marche, de réchauffement, de conditionnement ou d’arrêt; les
modifications non-autorisées du moteur. De plus, Komatsu n’est pas responsable de bris causés par de l’essence inadéquate ou de l’eau, des saletés ou autres
contaminants dans l’essence. Komatsu n’est pas responsable des réparations non-reliées au moteur, des dépenses encourues suite aux temps d’arrêts, des
dommages relatifs, amendes, et de tout autre coût d’affaires ou autres pertes résultant d’un bris couvert par la garantie.
KOMATSU N’EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES INCIDENTS OU DOMMAGES CONSÉQUENTS.
Cette garantie, ainsi que les garanties expresses commerciales, sont les seules garanties de Komatsu. IL N’Y A AUCUNE AUTRE
GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU SOUS -ENTENDUE, MARCHANDABLE OU PROPICE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE.
CEHQ000700 - Komatsu America International Company 12/99

INFORMATION IMPORTANTE SUR LE MOTEUR AVERTISSEMENT
CE MOTEUR EST CONFORME AUX NORMES AMÉRICAINES DEL’EPA (ANNÉE DU DES BLESSURES PEUVENT RÉSULTER ET LA GARANTIE
MODÈLE) ET DE LA CALIFORNIE POUR LES MOTEURS LARGES NON-ROUTIERS A IGNI- S’ANNULER SI LES RPM DU TAUX D’ESSENCE OU L’ALTITUDE
TION PAR COMPRESSION. CE MOTEUR EST CERTIFIÉ POUR OPERATION À ESSENCE EXCÈDENT LES VALEURS MAXIMALES PUBLIÉES POUR CE
DIÉSEL. MODÈLE ET SON APPLICATION.
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION

THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO YYYY MODEL YEAR U.S. EPA REGULATION AND THE CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS LARGE NON ROAD COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES. THIS ENGINE IS CERTI-
FIED TO OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
MODÈLE DU MOTEUR WARNING NO. SÉRIE
INJURY MAY RESULT AND WARRANTY IS VOIDED IF FUEL RATE RPM OR ALTITUDES EXCEED
PUBLISHED MAXIMUM VALUES FOR THIS MODEL AND APPLICATION.
FAMILLE DU MOTEUR ENGINE MODEL SERIAL NO. DÉPLACEMENT
SYSTÈME DE ENGINE FAMILY DISPLACEMENT LITERS

CONTROLE DES
ÉMISSIONS D’ÉCHAPPEMENT EXHAUST EMISSION
FIRING ORDER 1-5-3-6-2-4 LITRES
CONTROL SYSTEM
ADV. LOAD OUTPUT Kw ( HP) RPM
CHARGE DE SORTIE ADV. SÉQUENCE DE MISE À FEU
VALVE LASH IN. EX. FUEL RATE mm3/STROKE mm3/BATTEMENT
PORTÉE DE VALVE À FROID COLD (mm) AT ADV.
(mm) TAUX D’ESSENCE À ADV.
VITESSE STATIQUE IDLE SPEED RPM FAMILY EMISSION LIMIT

INITIAL INJECTION DEG. BTDC DATE OF MANUFACTURE LIMITE D’ÉMISSION DE
TIMING LA FAMILLE
RÉGLAGE DE L’ALLUMAGE - _____________________________________________ KOMATSU LTD.

INJECTION INITIALE MADE IN JAPAN DATE
DE FABRICATION
DEG. BTDC
KOMATSU LTÉE
FABRIQUÉ AU JAPON
ENGINE DATAPLATE - ENGLISH / FRENCH

OM1059 Introduction - Section 1
Page 10-1
INTRODUCTION
FOREWORD
This manual is written for use by the operator and/or the service technician. It is designed to help these persons to
become fully knowledgeable of the truck and all its systems in order to keep it operating safely and efficiently. All
operators and maintenance personnel must read and understand the materials in this manual before operating the
truck or performing maintenance and/or operational checks on the truck. All safety notices, warnings, and cautions
must be understood and followed when operating or repairing the truck.
A product identification plate is located on the frame in front of the right side front wheel and designates the truck
model number, product identification number (vehicle serial number), and maximum GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
rating.
The Komatsu truck model designation consists of three numbers and one letter (i.e. 930E).
The three numbers represent the basic truck model.
The letter E, when present, designates an electrical wheel motor drive system.
The product identification number (vehicle serial number) contains information which will identify the original manu-
facturing bill of material for this unit. This complete number will be necessary for proper ordering of many service
parts and/or warranty consideration.
The GVW is what determines the load on the drive train, frame, tires, and other components. The vehicle design
and application guidelines are sensitive to the total maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW is total weight:
the empty vehicle weight + the fuel and lubricants + the payload.
To determine allowable payload, fill all lubricants and fuel tank to the proper level. Weigh the truck and record this
value. Subtract it from the GVW to determine the allowable payload.
NOTE: Accumulations of mud, frozen material, etc., become part of the GVW and reduces allowable payload. To
maximize payload and to keep from exceeding the GVW rating, these accumulations must be removed as often as
practical.
Exceeding the allowable payload will reduce the expected life of truck components.
Introduction - Section 1 OM1059
Page 10-2
TRUCK MODEL ILLUSTRATION
KOMATSU MODEL 730E DUMP TRUCK

Page 10-3
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The front cover of this manual includes a form number. This form number must be referenced when ordering addi-
tional copies of this manual, or for any other correspondence regarding the coverage in this manual.
Direct all inquiries to:
Komatsu America Corp.
Datakom, Peoria Technical Publications
P.O. Box 240
Peoria, IL 61650-0240
United States of America
Fax (309) 672-7072
This first section is an Introduction to the manual. It contains the Table of Contents for locating specific areas of
interest. Other sections include:
• Standard Charts and Tables
• Safety
• Warnings and Cautions
• Operating Instructions
• Operator Cab and Controls
• Lubrication and Service
• Automatic Lubrication System
• Major Component Descriptions/Specifications
• Payload Meter III
• Radio, AM/FM, Cassette
When searching for a specific area of interest, go first to the Table of Contents to locate the section in which the
subject might generally be included. Then, go to that section of the Table of Contents to find a subject description
that most closely describes the specific area of interest to find a page number, and go to that page. Section num-
bers and page numbers are located at the top, outside corner of the page.
At the top, inside corner of the page is a document (module) number. If there is ever a question regarding the infor-
mation in a particular section, refer to the document (module) number, the manual form number, and use the
address shown above to correspond. If there is a date (month/year) behind the document (module) number, that
date indicates the latest revision date of that page.
The illustrations used in this manual are typical of the component shown, and may not be an exact reproduction of
what is found on the truck.
This manual shows dimensioning of U.S. standard and metric (SI) units throughout. All references to right, left,
front, or rear are made with respect to the operator's normal seated position, unless specifically stated otherwise.
When assembly instructions are provided without references to torque values, standard torque values must be
used. Standard torque requirements are shown in the torque charts on the following pages of the next section and
in the General Information section of the truck shop manual. Individual torques, when provided in the text, are in
bold face type, such as 135 N·m (100 ft lbs). All torque specifications have ±10% tolerance, unless otherwise
specified.
Page 10-4
ALERTS PAGE
This ALERT symbol is used in this manual, along with

the signal words CAUTION, DANGER, and WARNING, to
alert the reader to hazards arising from improper operat-
ing and maintenance practices.
DANGER identifies a specific potential hazard

WHICH WILL RESULT
in either INJURY OR DEATH
if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING identifies a specific potential hazard

WHICH MAY RESULT
in either INJURY OR DEATH
if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION is used for general reminders

of proper safety practices
OR
to direct the reader’s attention to avoid unsafe
or improper practices which may result
in damage to the equipment.
Page 10-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SECTION/PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 10
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
TRUCK MODEL ILLUSTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
ALERTS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 12
GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 20

PERSONAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Truck Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Clothing And Personal Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Unauthorized Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Leaving The Operator’s Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Mounting And Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
Fire Extinguishers And First Aid Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
Precautions For High Temperature Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
Fire Prevention For Fuel And Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2
ROPS Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-3
Preventing Injury From Work Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-3
Precautions For Optional Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-3
Precautions When Starting The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-3
PRECAUTIONS FOR TRUCK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Safety Is Thinking Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Safety At The Work Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Preparing For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Ventilation For Enclosed Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
Mirrors, Windows, And Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
In The Operator’s Cab - Before Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
Page 10-6
OPERATING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Truck Operation - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Traveling In The Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Precautions When Traveling In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Traveling On Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Ensuring Good Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Operating On Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Avoid Damage To The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Driving Near High-Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
When Loading The Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
When Dumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Working On Loose Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Parking The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Battery Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Jump-Starting With Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Stopping The Engine Before Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Warning Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Securing The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
DURING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Working Under The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Keeping The Machine Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Rules To Follow When Adding Fuel Or Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Radiator Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Page 10-7
Use Of Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
Precautions With The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Handling High-Pressure Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Precautions With High-Pressure Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Maintenance Near High Temperatures And High Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Rotating Fan And Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Waste Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Handling Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Tire Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Storing Tires After Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
ADDITIONAL JOB SITE RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
WHEN REPAIRS ARE NECESSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-14
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 22
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 30

PREPARING FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-1
SAFETY IS THINKING AHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-1
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-1
ENGINE START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-5
AFTER ENGINE HAS STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-5
MACHINE OPERATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-6
LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-7
HAULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-7
PASSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-7
DUMPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-8
To Raise The Dump Body: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-8
To Lower The Dump Body: (When dumping over a berm or into a crusher): . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-8
To Lower The Dump Body (When dumping on flat ground): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-9
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-9
Page 10-8
SAFE PARKING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
SUDDEN LOSS OF POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
OPERATOR CAB AND CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 32
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
HORN BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
TILT/TELESCOPE LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
MULTI-FUNCTION TURN SIGNAL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
Turn Signal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
High Beam Headlight Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
DYNAMIC RETARDER PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
Optional - Dual Function/Single Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
THROTTLE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
CAB CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS AND VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Defroster Vent Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Heat Control Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Heater/Air Conditioner Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4

Page 10-9
OVERHEAD PANEL CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
GRADE/SPEED WARNING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
RADIO SPEAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
WARNING ALARM BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
CAB RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
WARNING LIGHTS DIMMER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
WARNING/STATUS INDICATOR LIGHT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
AIR CLEANER VACUUM GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
CENTER CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
TRUCK CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
F-N-R Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
Hoist Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
CONSOLE SWITCHES AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
LH Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
RH Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Engine Shutdown Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Statex III Download Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Engine Diagnostic Port (CENSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Modular Mining Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Engine Diagnostic Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Engine Diagnostics Connector vbb bvbnvfvb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Data Storage Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8

Page 10-10
PAYLOAD METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
Payload Meter Download Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
OPERATOR SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
CONTROL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
CONTROL SWITCHES AND GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12
Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12
Timer Delayed Engine Shutdown Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Fog Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Ladder Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Backup Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Panel Illumination Lights And Dimmer Rheostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Cab Air Conditioner/Heater Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Engine Cold Weather Starting Aid Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Rotating Beacon Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Heated Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Wheel Brake Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
Digital Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
Right Turn Signal Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
High Beam Headlight Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
Left Turn Signal Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
Digital Speedometer/Payload Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15
Engine Water Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15
Engine Hourmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-15

Page 10-11
Panel Illumination Lights And Dimmer Rheostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-15
Payload Meter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-15
OVERHEAD STATUS/WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-16
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-16
INDICATOR LIGHT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-17
High Hydraulic Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-17
Low Steering Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-17
Low Accumulator Precharge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-17
Electric System Fault Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Low Brake Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Low Hydraulic Tank Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Low Automatic Lubrication System Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Circuit Breaker Tripped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Hydraulic Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Parking Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Service Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-18
Body Up Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Dynamic Retarding Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Stop Engine Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Backup Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Engine Shutdown Timer - Five Minute Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Retard Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Service Engine Indicator (AEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
High Wheel Motor Temperature Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-19
Blower Fault Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-20
Service Engine Indicator (CEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-20
Komatsu Engines w/Centry™ Fuel Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-20
Hazard Warning Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-20
Lamp Test Switch/Centry™ Diagnostic Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-20

Page 10-12
CENTRY™ FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-21
GENERAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-21
DETERMINING FAULT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-21
EXITING THE DIAGNOSTICS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22
VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM (VHMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
BASIC PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
INTERFACE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-24
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 40

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
HYDRAULIC TANK SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Adding Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Radiator Filling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Antifreeze Temperature Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
LUBRICATION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3
10 HOUR LUBE AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4
50 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-5
100 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6
1000 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10
10,000 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12

Page 10-13
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 50
PAYLOAD METER III™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 60
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-1
PAYLOAD METER III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Data Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Data Gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Suspension Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Payload Operator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Speed Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Body-Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Brake Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Key Switch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Payload Meter Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Load Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Wiring and Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-9
TCI Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-9
OPERATOR’S DISPLAY AND SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Reading the Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Reading the Load Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Using the Operator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Using the Load and Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Total Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Total Load Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11

Page 10-14
Clearing the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
Viewing Live Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
Other Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
PAYLOAD OPERATION AND CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Description of Haul Cycle States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Haul Cycle Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Carry Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
SOURCES FOR PAYLOAD ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Payload Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Swingloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Speed and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
HAUL CYCLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Haul Cycle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15
Haul Cycle Warning Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-16
M: Haul Cycle Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
N: Sensor Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Frame Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Sprung Weight Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Maximum Speed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Fault Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
PC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
Installing the PLM III Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
DOWNLOADING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20

Page 10-15
PLM III SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Displayed Payload Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Time Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Connection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Connecting to the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Configure the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Setting the Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Gauge Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Frame Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Truck Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Komatsu Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Komatsu Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Clean Truck Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-24
Inclinometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-24
DATA ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Creating a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Truck Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Date Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-26
Sorting on Time Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-26
Payload Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-27
Creating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-27
Summary - One Page Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-28
Detailed - Multi-Page Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-28
Creating Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
CSV Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-31
Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-31

Page 10-16
Deleting Haul Cycle Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-31
Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-32
Deleting Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-32
RADIO, AM/FM, CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 70

GENERAL RECEIVER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Turning The Power On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Setting The Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Adjusting Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
SETTING THE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
OPERATING THE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
TUNE/SEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
SEEK Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3
PROGRAMMING PRESET STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3
OPERATION OF THE WEATHERBAND (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3
SATELLITE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
Operating Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
Program Type Search (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
CASSETTE PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Playing A Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Cassette Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Programmable Eject Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Bad Tape Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-6
Cleaning The Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-6

OM1200 3/05 Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12
Page 12-1
STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES

This manual provides dual dimensioning for most EFFECT OF SPECIAL LUBRICANTS
specifications. U.S. standard units are specified first, On Fasteners and Standard Torque Values
with metric (SI) units in parentheses.
The Komatsu engineering department does not
References throughout the manual to standard torques recommend the use of special friction-reducing
or other standard values will be to one of the following lubricants, such as Copper Coat, Never-Seez®, and
charts or tables. For values not shown in these charts other similar products, on the threads of standard
or tables, standard conversion factors for most fasteners where standard torque values are applied.
commonly used measurements are provided in TABLE The use of special friction-reducing lubricants will
XIII, page 12-6. significantly alter the clamping force being applied to
Standard torque values are not to be used when “turn- fasteners during the tightening process.
of-the-nut” tightening procedures are recommended. If special friction-reducing lubricants are used with the
standard torque values listed below in Table I (and in
INDEX OF TABLES Komatsu shop manuals), excessive stress and
TABLE I . . . . . . . Standard Torque Chart (SAE) .. 12-1 possible breakage of the fasteners may result.
TABLE II . Standard Torque, 12-Point, Grade 9 .. 12-2
TABLE III . . Standard Metric Assembly Torque .. 12-2 Where the torque tables specify “Lubricated Threads”
TABLE IV . . . . . . JIC Swivel Nuts Torque Chart .. 12-3 for the standard torque values listed, these standard
TABLE V . . . . . . . . .Pipe Thread Torque Chart .. 12-3 torque values are to be used with simple lithium base
TABLE VI . . . . . . . . O-Ring Boss Torque Chart .. 12-3 chassis grease (multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a rust-
TABLEVII . . . . O-Ring Face Seal Torque Chart .. 12-3 preventive grease (see list, page 12-2) on the threads
TABLE VIII . Torque Conversions (ft lbs to N•m) .. 12-4 and seats unless specified otherwise.
TABLE IX . Torque Conversions (ft lbs to kg•m) .. 12-4 NOTE: Ensure the threads of fasteners and tapped
TABLE X . . Pressure Conversions (psi to kPa) .. 12-4 holes are free of burrs and other imperfections before
TABLE XI . Pressure Conversions (psi to MPa) .. 12-5 assembling.
TABLE XII . . . . . . . .Temperature Conversions .. 12-5
TABLE XIII . . . Common Conversion Multipliers .. 12-6
TABLE I. STANDARD TORQUE CHART

SAE HEX HEAD CAP SCREW AND NUT ASSEMBLY
Grade 5 (LUBRICATED THREADS) Grade 8
TOLERANCES ±10%
Capscrew TORQUE - TORQUE - Capscrew TORQUE - TORQUE -

Thread GRADE 5 GRADE 8 Thread GRADE 5 GRADE 8
Size ft lbs kg•m N•m ft lbs kg•m N•m Size ft lbs kg•m N•m ft lbs kg•m N•m
1/4-20 7 0.97 9.5 10 1.38 13.6 3/4-16 235 32.5 319 335 46.3 454
1/4-28 8 1.11 10.8 11 1.52 14.9 7/8-9 350 48.4 475 500 69.2 678
5/16-18 15 2.07 20.3 21 2.90 28 7/8-14 375 51.9 508 530 73.3 719
5/16-24 16 2.21 22 22 3.04 30 1.0-8 525 72.6 712 750 103.7 1017
3/8-16 25 3.46 34 35 4.84 47 1.0-12 560 77.4 759 790 109.3 1071
3/8-24 30 4.15 41 40 5.5 54 1.0-14 570 78.8 773 800 110.6 1085
7/16-14 40 5.5 54 58 8.0 79 1 1/8-7 650 89.9 881 1050 145 1424
7/16-20 45 6.2 61 62 8.57 84 1 1/8-12 700 96.8 949 1140 158 1546
1/2-13 65 9 88 90 12.4 122 1 1/4-7 910 125.9 1234 1480 205 2007
1/2-20 70 9.7 95 95 13.1 129 1 1/4-12 975 134.8 1322 1580 219 2142
9/16-12 90 12.4 122 125 17.3 169 1 3/8-6 1200 166 1627 1940 268 2630
9/16-18 95 13.1 129 135 18.7 183 1 3/8-12 1310 181 1776 2120 293 2874
5/8-11 125 17.3 169 175 24.2 237 1 1/2-6 1580 219 2142 2560 354 3471
5/8-18 135 18.7 183 190 26.2 258 1 1/2-12 1700 235 2305 2770 383 3756
3/4-10 220 30.4 298 310 42.8 420
1 ft. lbs. = 0.138 kg•m = 1.356 N•m
Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12 OM1200 3/05
Page 12-2
STANDARD ASSEMBLY TORQUES STANDARD ASSEMBLY TORQUES

For 12-Point, Grade 9 Cap screws (SAE) For Class 10.9 Cap screws & Class 10 Nuts
The following specifications apply to required assembly The following specifications apply to required assembly
torques for all 12-point, grade 9 (170,000 psi minimum torques for all metric Class 10.9 finished hexagon head
tensile) cap screws. cap screws and Class 10 nuts.
• Cap screw threads and seats shall be lubricated • Cap screw threads and seats shall not be
when assembled. lubricated when assembled. These specifications
are based on all cap screws, nuts, and hardened
NOTE: Unless the instructions specifically recommend washers being phosphate and oil coated.
otherwise, these standard torque values are to be used
with simple lithium base chassis grease (multi-purpose NOTE: If zinc-plated hardware is used, each piece
EP NLGI) or a rust preventive grease (see list, this must be lubricated with simple lithium base chassis
page) on the threads. grease (multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a rust preventive
grease (see list, this page) to achieve the same
• Torques are calculated to give a clamping force of clamping forces provided below.
approximately 75% of proof load.
• Torques are calculated to give a clamping force of
• The maximum torque tolerance shall be ±10% of
approximately 75% of proof load.
the torque value shown.
• The maximum torque tolerance shall be within
±10% of the torque value shown.
TABLE II. STANDARD ASSEMBLY TORQUE
for 12-Point, Grade 9 Cap screws TABLE III. STANDARD ASSEMBLY TORQUE
for Metric Class 10.9 Cap screws & Class 10 Nuts
CAPSCREW TORQUE TORQUE TORQUE
SIZE* ft lbs N•m kg•m CAPSCREW TORQUE TORQUE TORQUE
0.250 - 20 12 16 1.7 SIZE* N•m ft lbs kg•m
0.312 - 18 24 33 3.3 M6 x1 12 9 1.22
0.375 - 16 42 57 5.8 M8 x 1.25 30 22 3.06
0.438 -14 70 95 9.7 M10 x 1.5 55 40 5.61
0.500 -13 105 142 14.5 M12 x 1.75 95 70 9.69
0.562 - 12 150 203 20.7 M14 x 2 155 114 15.81
0.625 - 11 205 278 28.3 M16 x 2 240 177 24.48
0.750 - 10 360 488 49.7 M20 x 2.25 465 343 47.43
0.875 - 9 575 780 79.4 M24 x 3 800 590 81.6
1.000 - 8 860 1166 119 M30 x 3.5 1600 1180 163.2
1.000 - 12 915 1240 126 M36 x 4 2750 2028 280.5
1.125 - 7 1230 1670 170 * Shank Diameter (mm) - Threads per millimeter
1.125 - 12 1330 1800 184 This table represents standard values only. Do not use these
1.250 - 7 1715 2325 237 values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly
1.250 - 12 1840 2495 254 instructions.
1.375 - 6 2270 3080 313
1.375 - 12 2475 3355 342 Suggested* Sources for Rust Preventive Grease:
1.500 - 6 2980 4040 411 • AMERICAN ANTI-RUST GREASE #3-X from
1.500 - 12 3225 4375 445 Standard Oil Company (also American Oil Co.)
* Shank Diameter (in.) - Threads per inch
• GULF NORUST #3 from Gulf Oil Company.
This table represents standard values only. Do not use these
values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly • MOBILARMA 355, Product No. 66705 from Mobil
instructions. Oil Corporation.
• RUST BAN 326 from Humble Oil Company.
• RUSTOLENE B GREASE from Sinclair Oil Co.
• RUST PREVENTIVE GREASE - CODE 312 from
the Southwest Grease and Oil Company.
NOTE: This list represents the current engineering
approved sources for use in Komatsu manufacture. It is
not exclusive. Other products may meet the same
specifications of this list.
Page 12-3
TABLE IV. TABLE VI.

TORQUE CHART FOR JIC 37° SWIVEL NUTS TORQUE CHART FOR
WITH OR WITHOUT O-RING SEALS O-RING BOSS FITTINGS
SIZE TUBE SIZE THREADS TORQUE SIZE TUBE SIZE THREADS TORQUE
CODE (O.D.) UNF-2B FT. LBS. CODE (O.D.) UNF-2B FT. LBS.
–2 0.125 0.312 – 24 4 ±1 –2 0.125 0.312 – 24 4 ±2
–3 0.188 0.375 – 24 8 ±3 –3 0.188 0.375 – 24 5 ±2
–4 0.250 0.438 – 20 12 ±3 –4 0.250 0.438 – 20 8 ±3
–5 0.312 0.500 – 20 15 ±3 –5 0.312 0.500 – 20 10 ±3
–6 0.375 0.562 – 18 18 ±5 –6 0.375 0.562 – 18 13 ±3
–8 0.500 0.750 – 16 30 ±5 –8 0.500 0.750 – 16 24 ±5
– 10 0.625 0.875 – 14 40 ±5 – 10 0.625 0.875 – 14 32 ±5
– 12 0.750 1.062 – 12 55 ±5 – 12 0.750 1.062 – 12 48 ±5
– 14 0.875 1.188 – 12 65 ±5 – 14 0.875 1.188 – 12 54 ±5
– 16 1.000 1.312 – 12 80 ±5 – 16 1.000 1.312 – 12 72 ±5
– 20 1.250 1.625 – 12 100 ±10 – 20 1.250 1.625 – 12 80 ±5
– 24 1.500 1.875 – 12 120 ±10 – 24 1.500 1.875 – 12 80 ±5
– 32 2.000 2.500 – 12 230 ±20 – 32 2.000 2.500 – 12 96 ±10
TABLE V. TABLE VII.

TORQUE CHART FOR TORQUE CHART FOR
PIPE THREAD FITTINGS O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS
PIPE WITH WITHOUT SIZE TUBE SIZE THREADS TORQUE

SIZE THREAD SEALANT SEALANT CODE (O.D.) UNF-2B FT. LBS.
CODE SIZE FT. LBS. FT. LBS.
–4 0.250 0.438 – 20 11 ±1
–2 0.125 – 27 15 ±3 20 ±5
–6 0.375 0.562 – 18 18 ±2
–4 0.250 – 18 20 ±5 25 ±5 –8 0.500 0.750 – 16 35 ±4
–6 0.375 – 18 25 ±5 35 ±5
– 10 0.625 0.875 – 14 51 ±5
–8 0.500 – 14 35 ±5 45 ±5
– 12 0.750 1.062 – 12 71 ±7
– 12 0.750 – 14 45 ±5 55 ±5 – 16 1.000 1.312 – 12 98 ±6
– 16 1.000 – 11.50 55 ±5 65 ±5
– 20 1.250 1.625 – 12 132 ±7
– 20 1.250 – 11.50 70 ±5 80 ±5
– 24 1.500 1.875 – 12 165 ±15
– 24 1.500 – 11.50 80 ±5 95 ±10
– 32 2.000 – 11.50 95 ±10 120 ±10
Page 12-4
TABLE VIII. TORQUE CONVERSIONS

Foot Pounds (ft. lbs.) to Newton-meters (N•m)
ft lbs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 (N.m) 1.36 2.71 4.07 5.42 6.78 8.14 9.49 10.85 12.20
10 13.56 14.91 16.27 17.63 18.98 20.34 21.69 23.05 24.40 25.76
20 27.12 28.47 29.83 31.18 32.54 33.90 35.25 36.61 37.96 39.32
30 40.67 42.03 43.39 44.74 46.10 47.45 48.81 50.17 51.52 52.87
40 54.23 55.59 56.94 58.30 59.66 60.01 62.37 63.72 65.08 66.44
50 67.79 69.15 70.50 71.86 73.21 74.57 75.93 77.28 78.64 80.00
60 81.35 82.70 84.06 85.42 86.77 88.13 89.48 90.84 92.20 93.55
70 94.91 96.26 97.62 98.97 100.33 101.69 103.04 104.40 105.75 107.11
80 108.47 109.82 111.18 112.53 113.89 115.24 116.60 117.96 119.31 120.67
90 122.03 123.38 124.74 126.09 127.45 128.80 130.16 131.51 132.87 134.23
See NOTE on page 12-5 regarding table usage.
TABLE IX. TORQUE CONVERSIONS

Foot Pounds (ft. lbs.) to kilogram-meters (kg•m)
ft lbs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 (kg.m) 0.138 0.277 0.415 0.553 0.692 0.830 0.968 1.106 1.245
10 1.38 1.52 1.66 1.80 1.94 2.07 2.21 2.35 2.49 2.63
20 2.77 2.90 3.04 3.18 3.32 3.46 3.60 3.73 3.87 4.01
30 4.15 4.29 4.43 4.56 4.70 4.84 4.98 5.12 5.26 5.39
40 5.53 5.67 5.81 5.95 6.09 6.22 6.36 6.50 6.64 6.78
50 6.92 7.05 7.19 7.33 7.47 7.61 7.74 7.88 8.02 8.16
60 8.30 8.44 8.57 8.71 8.85 8.99 9.13 9.27 9.40 9.54
70 9.68 9.82 9.96 10.10 10.23 10.37 10.51 10.65 10.79 10.93
80 11.06 11.20 11.34 11.48 11.62 11.76 11.89 12.03 12.17 12.30
90 12.45 12.59 12.72 12.86 13.00 13.14 13.28 13.42 13.55 13.69
TABLE X. PRESSURE CONVERSIONS

Pounds per square inch (psi) to Kilopascals (kPa)
Formula: psi x 6.895 = kPa
psi 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 (kPa) 6.895 13.79 20.68 27.58 34.47 41.37 48.26 55.16 62.05
10 68.95 75.84 82.74 89.63 96.53 103.42 110.32 117.21 124.1 131.0
20 137.9 144.8 151.7 158.6 165.5 172.4 179.3 186.2 193.1 200.0
30 206.8 213.7 220.6 227.5 234.4 241.3 248.2 255.1 262.0 268.9
40 275.8 282.7 289.6 296.5 303.4 310.3 317.2 324.1 331.0 337.9
50 344.7 351.6 358.5 365.4 372.3 379.2 386.1 393.0 399.9 406.8
60 413.7 420.6 427.5 434.4 441.3 448.2 455.1 462.0 468.9 475.8
70 482.6 489.5 496.4 503.3 510.2 517.1 524.0 530.9 537.8 544.7
80 551.6 558.5 565.4 572.3 579.2 586.1 593.0 599.9 606.8 613.7
90 620.5 627.4 634.3 641.2 648.1 655.0 661.9 668.8 675.7 682.6
Page 12-5
TABLE XI. PRESSURE CONVERSIONS

Pounds per square inch (psi) to Megapascals (MPa)
Formula: psi x 0.0069 = MPa
psi 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0 (MPa) 0.069 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.34 0.41 0.48 0.55 0.62
100 0.69 0.76 0.83 0.90 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.31
200 1.38 1.45 1.52 1.59 1.65 1.72 1.79 1.86 1.93 2.00
300 2.07 2.14 2.21 2.28 2.34 2.41 2.48 2.55 2.62 2.69
400 2.76 2.83 2.90 2.96 3.03 3.10 3.17 3.24 3.31 3.38
500 3.45 3.52 3.59 3.65 3.72 3.79 3.86 3.93 4.00 4.07
600 4.14 4.21 4.27 4.34 4.41 4.48 4.55 4.62 4.69 4.76
700 4.83 4.90 4.96 5.03 5.10 5.17 5.24 5.31 5.38 5.45
800 5.52 5.58 5.65 5.72 5.79 5.86 5.93 6.00 6.07 6.14
900 6.21 6.27 6.34 6.41 6.48 6.55 6.62 6.69 6.76 6.83
See NOTE below regarding Table usage.
NOTE: Tables such as Table VIII, IX, X, and XI may be used as in the following example:
Example: Convert 975 psi to kilopascals (kPa). 3. Multiply by 10:
970 psi = 6688 kPa.
1. Select Table X.
4. Go to psi row 0, column 5; read 34.475
2. Go to psi row 90, column 7; read 668.8
psi = 34.47 kPa. Add to step 3.
97 psi = 668.8 kPa.
5. 970 + 5 psi = 6688 + 34 = 6722 kPa.
TABLE XII. TEMPERATURE CONVERSIONS

Formula: F° - 32 ³ 1.8 = C° or C° x 1.8 + 32 = F°
CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT

C° F° C° F° C° F°
121 250 482 63 145 293 4 40 104
118 245 473 60 140 284 2 35 95
116 240 464 57 135 275 –1 30 86
113 235 455 54 130 266 –4 25 77
110 230 446 52 125 257 –7 20 68
107 225 437 49 120 248 –9 15 59
104 220 428 46 115 239 – 12 10 50
102 215 419 43 110 230 – 15 5 41
99 210 410 41 105 221 – 18 0 32
96 205 401 38 100 212 – 21 –5 23
93 200 392 35 95 293 – 23 – 10 14
91 195 383 32 90 194 – 26 – 15 5
88 190 374 29 85 185 – 29 – 20 –4
85 185 365 27 80 176 – 32 – 25 – 13
82 180 356 24 75 167 – 34 – 30 – 22
79 175 347 21 70 158 – 37 – 35 – 31
77 170 338 18 65 149 – 40 – 40 – 40
74 165 329 15 60 140 – 43 – 45 – 49
71 160 320 13 55 131 – 46 – 50 – 58
68 155 311 10 50 122 – 48 – 55 – 67
66 150 302 7 45 113 – 51 – 60 – 76
Note: The numbers in the unmarked columns refer to temperature in either degrees Celsius (C°) or Fahrenheit (F°). Select a number in
this unmarked column and read to the left to convert to degrees Celsius (C°) or read to the right to convert to degrees Fahrenheit (F°). If
starting with a known temperature (either C° or F°), find that temperature in the marked column and read the converted temperature in the
center, unmarked column.
Page 12-6
Table XIII. TABLE XIII

COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS
COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS

ENGLISH TO METRIC METRIC TO ENGLISH
To Convert Multiply Multiply

From TO By To Convert From TO By
inch – in. millimeter (mm) 25.40 millimeter (mm) inch – in. 0.0394
inch – in. centimeter (cm) 2.54 centimeter (cm) inch – in. 0.3937
foot – ft. meter (m) 0.3048 meter (m) foot – ft. 3.2808
yard – yd. meter (m) 0.914 meter (m) yard – yd. 1.0936
mile – mi. kilometer (km) 1.61 kilometer (km) mile – mi. 0.6210
sq. in. – in. 2 sq. centimeters (cm2) 6.45 sq. centimeters (cm 2) sq. in. – in.2 0.1550
sq. ft. – ft.2 sq. centimeters (cm2) 929 sq. centimeters (cm2) sq. ft. – ft.2 0.001
cu. in. – in.3 cu. centimeters (cm3) 16.39 cu. centimeters (cm3) cu in – in.3 0.061
cu. in. – in.3 liters (l) 0.016 liters (l) cu in – in.3 61.02
cu. ft. – ft.3 cu. meters (m3) 0.028 cu. meters (m3) cu ft – ft.3 35.314
cu. ft. – ft.3 liters (l) 28.3 liters (l) cu ft – ft.3 0.0353
ounce – oz. kilogram (kg) 0.028 grams (g) ounce – oz. 0.0353
fluid ounce – fl. oz. milliliter (ml) 29.573 milliliter (ml) fluid ounce – fl. oz. 0.0338
pound (mass) kilogram (kg) 0.454 kilogram (kg) pound (mass) 2.2046
pound (force) – lbs. Newton (N) 4.448 Newton (N) pound (force) – lbs. 0.2248
in. lbs. (force) Newton-meters (N•m) 0.113 Newton-meters (N•m) kilogram-meters (kg•m) 0.102
ft. lbs. (force) Newton-meters (N•m) 1.356 Newton-meters (N.m) ft lbs 0.7376
ft. lbs. (force) kilogram-meters (kg•m) 0.138 kilogram-meters (kg•m) ft lbs 7.2329
psi (pressure) kilopascals (kPa) 6.895 kilogram-meters (kg•m) Newton-meters (N•m) 9.807
psi (pressure) megapascals (MPa) 0.007 kilopascals (kPa) psi 0.1450
psi (pressure) 2
kilograms/cm (kg/cm ) 2 0.0704 megapascals (MPa) psi 145.038
ton (short) kilogram (kg) 907.2 kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2) psi 14.2231
ton (short) metric ton 0.0907 kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2) kilopascals (kPa) 98.068
quart – qt. liters (l) 0.946 kilogram (kg) ton 0.0011
gallon – gal. liters (l) 3.785 metric ton ton 1.1023
HP (horsepower) Watts 745.7 liters (l) quart – qt. 1.0567
HP (horsepower) kilowatts (kw) 0.745 liters (l) gallon – gal. 0.2642
Watts Horsepower HP 0.00134
kilowatts (kw) Horsepower HP 1.3410
OM2036 06/06 Safety - Section 20
Page 20-1
GENERAL SAFETY
Safety records of most organizations will show that • Wear a hard hat, safety glasses, safety shoes,
the greatest percentage of accidents are caused by mask, and gloves when operating or maintaining
unsafe behavior. The remainder are caused by a machine. Wear safety goggles, a hard hat, and
unsafe mechanical or physical conditions. Report all heavy gloves if your job involves scattering metal
unsafe conditions to the proper authority. chips or very small materials--particularly when
driving pins with a hammer, or when cleaning air
The following safety rules are provided as a guide for cleaner elements with compressed air. Also,
the operator. However, local conditions and regula- ensure that the work area is free of other
tions may add many more to this list. personnel during such tasks.
Unauthorized Modification
• Any modification made to this vehicle, without
authorization from Komatsu America Corp., can
Read and follow all safety precautions. Failure to possibly create hazards.
do so may result in serious injury or death. • Before making any modification, consult your
authorized regional Komatsu America Corp.
PERSONAL SAFETY distributor. Komatsu will not be responsible for
any injury or damage caused by any
Safety Rules unauthorized modification.
• Only trained and authorized personnel can Leaving The Operator’s Seat
operate and maintain the machine.
• When leaving the operator's seat, DO NOT touch
• Follow all safety rules, precautions, and
any controls. To prevent accidents from
instructions when operating or performing
occurring, perform the following:
maintenance on the machine.
Move the selector switch to NEUTRAL, and apply
• When working with another operator, or a person
the parking brake.
on work site traffic duty, ensure all personnel
understand all hand signals that are to be used. Lower the dump body, and move the hoist control
lever to the FLOAT position.
Truck Safety Features
Stop the engine. When exiting the machine, lock
• Ensure all guards and covers are in their proper compartments, and take the keys with you to
position. Repair any damaged guards and prevent entry from unauthorized persons.
covers. (See Walk-Around Inspection, later in this
section.) Mounting And Dismounting
• Learn the proper use of safety features, such as • DO NOT jump on or off the machine. DO NOT
safety locks, safety pins, and seat belts. Use climb on or off a machine while it is moving.
these safety features properly.
• When climbing on or off a machine, face the
• DO NOT remove any safety features. Keep machine and use the handhold and steps.
safety features in good operating condition.
• DO NOT hold any control levers when getting on
• Improper use of safety features may result in or off a machine.
serious bodily injury or death.
• Maintain three-point contact with the handholds
Clothing And Personal Items and steps to ensure that you support yourself.
• Avoid wearing loose • When bringing tools up to the operating deck,

clothing, jewelry, and pass them by hand or pull them up by rope.
loose long hair. They • If there is any oil, grease, or mud on the
can catch on controls handholds or steps, wipe them clean
or in moving parts immediately. Keep these components clean.
and cause serious Repair any damage, and tighten any loose bolts.
injury or death.
Additionally, DO
NOT wear oily
clothes as they are
flammable.
Safety - Section 20 OM2036 06/06
Page 20-2
Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows • To prevent hot engine oil spray:
in the diagram below when climbing on or off 1. Stop the engine.
the machine.
2. Wait for the oil temperature to cool.
3. Turn the cap slowly to allow pressure to dissipate.
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention

Asbestos dust is hazardous to
your health when inhaled. If you
handle materials containing
asbestos fibers, follow the
guidelines below:
• DO NOT use compressed
air for cleaning.
• Use water for cleaning and to control dust.
• Operate the machine or perform tasks with the
wind to your back, whenever possible.
Fire Extinguishers And First Aid Kits
• Use an approved respirator, when necessary.
• Ensure fire extinguishers
are accessible and Fire Prevention For Fuel And Oil
proper usage techniques
are known. • Fuel, oil, and antifreeze can be ignited by a
flame. These fluids are extremely flammable and
• Provide a first aid kit at hazardous.
the storage point.
• Keep flames away from flammable fluids.
• Know what to do in the
event of a fire. • Stop the engine while refueling.
• Keep the phone numbers of persons you must • DO NOT smoke while refueling.
contact in case of an emergency. • Tighten all fuel and oil tank caps securely.
Precautions For High Temperature Fluids • Refuel and maintain oil in well-ventilated areas.
• Immediately after operating the • Keep oil and fuel in a designated location. DO
truck, engine coolant, engine NOT allow unauthorized persons to enter.
oil, and hydraulic oil are at high
temperatures and are
pressurized. If the cap is
removed, the fluids drained, the
filters are replaced, etc., there is
danger of serious burns. Allow heat and pressure
to dissipate before performing such tasks, and
follow proper procedures, as outlined in the
service manual.
• To prevent hot coolant from spraying:
1. Stop the engine, and wait for the coolant tem-
perature to decrease.
2. Depress the pressure relief button on the radiator
cap.
3. Turn the radiator cap slowly to allow pressure to
dissipate.
Page 20-3
ROPS Precautions Precautions For Optional Attachments

• The Rollover Protection Structure (ROPS) must • When installing and using optional equipment,
be properly installed before using the truck. read the instruction manual for the attachment
and the information related to attachments in this
• The ROPS is intended to protect the operator if manual.
the machine rolls over. It is designed not only to
support the load of the machine, but also to • DO NOT use attachments that are not authorized
absorb the energy of the impact. by Komatsu America Corp., or the authorized
regional Komatsu distributor. Use of
• ROPS structures, installed on equipment unauthorized attachments could create a safety
manufactured and designed by Komatsu
problem and adversely affect the proper
America Corp., fulfills all of the regulations and operation and useful life of the machine.
standards for all countries. If it is modified or
repaired without authorization from Komatsu, or • Any injuries, accidents, and product failures
is damaged when the machine rolls over, the resulting from the use of unauthorized
strength of the structure will be compromised and attachments, will not be the responsibility of
will not be able to fulfill its intended purpose. Komatsu America Corp., or the authorized
Optimum strength of the structure can only be regional Komatsu distributor.
achieved if it is repaired or modified, as specified
by Komatsu. Precautions When Starting The Machine
• When modifying or repairing the ROPS, consult • Start the engine from the
your nearest Komatsu distributor. operator’s seat only.
• Even with the ROPS installed, the operator must • DO NOT attempt to start the
use the seat belt when operating the machine. engine by shorting across the
starter terminals. This may
Preventing Injury From Work Equipment cause fire or serious injury or
death to anyone in the
• DO NOT position any part of your body between machine’s path.
movable parts, such as the dump body, chassis,
or cylinders. If the work equipment is operated,
clearances will change and may cause serious
bodily injury or death.
Page 20-4
PRECAUTIONS FOR TRUCK OPERATION • Check fuel, lubrication, and hydraulic systems for
leaks. Repair any leaks. Clean any excess oil,
Safety Is Thinking Ahead fuel, or other flammable fluids, and dispose of
properly.
Prevention is the best safety program. Prevent a
potential accident by knowing the employer's safety • Ensure a fire extinguisher is present and in
requirements and all necessary job site regulations. proper working condition.
In addition, know the proper use and care of all the • DO NOT operate the machine near open flames.
safety equipment on the truck. Only qualified opera-
tors or technicians may attempt to operate or main- Preparing For Operation
tain a Komatsu truck.
• Mount and dismount while facing the truck. DO
Safe practices start before the operator gets to the NOT attempt to mount or dismount the truck
equipment! while it is in motion. Use handrails and ladders
when mounting or dismounting the truck.
Safety At The Work Site • Check the deck areas for debris, loose hardware,
• When walking to and from a truck, maintain a and tools. Check for people and objects that
safe distance from all machines, even when the remain on or around the truck.
operator is visible. • Become familiar with and use all protective
• Before starting the engine, thoroughly check the equipment devices on the truck. Ensure that
area for any unusual conditions that could be these items (anti-skid material, grab bars, seat
dangerous. belts, etc.) are securely in place.
• Examine the road surface at the job site, and Ventilation For Enclosed Areas
determine the best and safest route.
• If it is necessary to start the
• Choose an area where the ground is as engine in an enclosed area,
horizontal and firm as possible before performing provide adequate ventilation.
the inspection. Exhaust fumes from the
• If you need to operate on or near a public road, engine can kill.
protect pedestrians and cars by designating a
person for work site traffic duty, or by installing
fences around the work site. Mirrors, Windows, And Lights
• The operator must personally check the work • Remove any dirt from the surface of the
position, the roads to be used, and the existence windshield, cab windows, mirrors, and lights.
of obstacles before starting the truck. Good visibility may prevent an accident.
• Determine the travel roads to be used at the work • Adjust the mirrors to a position where the
site. Travel roads must be maintained in order to operator can see best from the operator's seat.
ensure safe machine travel.
• Ensure the headlights, work lights, and taillights
• If travel through wet areas is necessary, check are in proper working order. Ensure that the
the depth and flow of water before crossing the machine is equipped with the proper work lamps
shallow parts. DO NOT drive through water needed for the operating conditions.
which exceeds the permissible water depth.
• Replace any broken mirrors, windows, or lights.
Fire Prevention
• Thoroughly remove wood
chips, leaves, paper, and
other flammable items
accumulated in the engine
compartment, as they could
cause a fire.
Page 20-5
In The Operator’s Cab - Before Starting The OPERATING THE MACHINE

Engine
Starting The Engine
• DO NOT leave tools or spare parts lying around
or allow trash to accumulate in the cab of the • DO NOT attempt to start the machine by shorting
truck. Keep all unauthorized reading material out across the starter terminals. This may cause a
of the truck cab. fire, or serious injury or death, to anyone in the
machine’s path.
• Keep the cab floor, controls, steps, and handrails
free of oil, grease, snow, and excess dirt. • Check for people and objects that remain on or
around the truck.
• Check the seat belt, buckle, and hardware for
damage or wear. Replace any worn or damaged • DO NOT start the engine if a warning tag has
parts. Use the seat belts when operating a been attached to the controls.
machine. • When starting the engine, sound the horn as an
• Read and understand the contents of the alert.
Operation and Maintenance manual. Read the • Start and operate the machine only while seated
safety and operating instructions with special in the operator’s seat.
attention. Become thoroughly acquainted with all
the gauges, instruments, and controls before • DO NOT allow any unauthorized persons in the
operating the truck. operator's compartment or any other place on the
machine.
• Read and understand the warning and caution
decals in the operator's cab. • For machines equipped with a back-up alarm,
check that the alarm works properly.
• Ensure the steering wheel, horn, controls, and
pedals are free of any oil, grease, or mud. Truck Operation - General
• Check the windshield wiper, the condition of the • Wear seat belts at all times.
wiper blades, and the washer fluid reservoir level.
• Only authorized persons are allowed to ride in
• Be familiar with all steering and brake system the truck. Passengers must be in the cab and
controls, warning devices, road speeds, and belted in the passenger seat.
loading capabilities before operating the truck.
• DO NOT allow anyone to ride on the decks or on
the steps of the truck.
• DO NOT allow anyone to get on or off the truck
while it is in motion.
• DO NOT move the truck in or out of a building
without a signal person present.
• Know and obey hand signal communications
between the operator and spotter. When other
machines and personnel are present, the
operator must move in and out of buildings,
loading areas, and through traffic, under the
direction of a signal person. Courtesy at all times
is a safety precaution!
• Immediately report any adverse conditions on the
haul road, pit, or dump area that may cause an
operating hazard.
Page 20-6
• Check for flat tires periodically during a shift. If • If the engine stops while the truck is in motion,
the truck has been operating on a flat, DO NOT the steering and brakes will continue to operate,
park indoors until the tire cools. If the tire must be but only for a fixed amount of oil consumption.
changed, DO NOT stand in front of the rim and Steer immediately to a safe spot, and stop the
locking ring when inflating a tire mounted on the truck. When the truck is completely stopped,
machine. Observers must not be permitted in the apply the parking brake.
area and must be kept away from the side of
such tires. Precautions When Traveling In Reverse
Before operating the
machine or work equip-
ment, do as follows:
The tire and rim assembly may explode if sub-

jected to excessive heat. Personnel must move to
a remote or protected location if there is a fire near
the tire and wheel area, or if the smell of burning • Ensure the back-up alarm works properly.
rubber or excessively hot brakes is evident. • Sound the horn to warn people in the area.
• Check for personnel near the machine. Do a
If the truck must be approached, such as to fight
thorough check behind the machine.
a fire, those personnel must do so only while fac-
ing the tread area of the tire (front or back), • When necessary, designate a person to watch
unless protected by the use of large heavy equip- the area for the truck operator. This is particularly
ment as a shield. Stay at least 15 m (50 ft) from necessary when traveling in reverse.
the tread of the tire. • When operating in hazardous areas and areas
with poor visibility, designate a person to direct
In the event of fire in the tire and wheel area work site traffic.
(including brake fires), stay away from the truck • DO NOT allow anyone to enter the line of travel
for at least eight hours, or until the tire and wheel of the machine. This rule must be strictly obeyed,
are cool. even with machines equipped with a back-up
alarm or rearview mirror.
• Keep serviceable, fire fighting equipment nearby.
Report used extinguishers for replacement or Traveling On Slopes
refilling.
• Traveling on slopes could result in the machine
• Apply the parking brake when the truck is parked
tipping over or slipping.
and unattended. DO NOT leave the truck
unattended while the engine is on. • DO NOT change direction on the slopes. To
ensure safety, drive to level ground before
• Park the truck a safe distance away from other
turning.
vehicles, as determined by the supervisor.
• DO NOT travel up and down on grass, fallen
• Stay alert at all times! In the event of an
leaves, or wet steel plates. These materials may
emergency, be prepared to react quickly and
cause the machine to slip on even the slightest
avoid accidents. If an emergency arises, know
slope. Avoid traveling sideways, and keep travel
where to get prompt assistance.
speed low.
Traveling In The Truck • When traveling downhill, use the retarder to
reduce speed. DO NOT turn the steering wheel
• When traveling on rough ground, travel at low
suddenly. DO NOT use the foot brake, except in
speeds. When changing direction, avoid turning
an emergency.
suddenly.
• If the engine stops on a slope, apply the service
• Lower the dump body, and set the dump lever to
brakes fully and stop the machine. Apply the
the FLOAT position before traveling.
parking brake after the machine has stopped.
Page 20-7
Ensuring Good Visibility The following actions are effective in preventing acci-
dents while working near high voltages:
• When working in dark places, install work lamps
and headlamps. • Wear shoes with rubber or leather soles.
• Safely stop the truck if visibility is poor, such as in • Use a signalman to give warning if the machine
mist, snow, or rain. Wait for the weather to approaches an electric cable.
improve to allow safe travel.
• If the work equipment must touch an electric
Operating On Snow cable, the operator must remain in the cab.
• When working on snowy or icy roads, there is • When working near high-voltage cables, DO
danger that the machine may slip on even the NOT allow anyone to approach the machine.
slightest slope. Travel slowly and avoid sudden • Check with the electrical maintenance
starting, turning, or stopping in these conditions. department about the voltage of the cables
• Use caution when clearing snow. The road before operating the truck.
shoulder and other objects may be buried in the
When Loading The Truck
snow and cannot be seen. When traveling on
snow-covered roads, install tire chains. • Ensure the surrounding area is safe. If so, stop
the machine in the correct loading position and
Avoid Damage To The Dump Body evenly load the body.
• When working in tunnels, on bridges, under • DO NOT leave the operator's seat during loading.
electric cables, or when entering an enclosed
area where there are height limits, use extreme When Dumping
caution. The dump body must be completely
lowered before driving. • Before starting, check that there is no person or
objects behind the machine.
• Stop the machine in the desired location. Check
again for persons or objects behind the machine.
Give the determined signal, then slowly operate
the dump body. If necessary, use blocks for the
Driving with a raised dump body, or raising the wheels or position a flagman.
dump body in an enclosed area, may result in
• When dumping on slopes, machine stability is
serious damage and bodily injury or death. Drive
poor and there is danger of tip over. Avoid
with the dump body resting on the frame.
dumping on slopes whenever possible.
Driving Near High-Voltage Cables • DO NOT travel with the dump body raised.
• Driving near high-voltage cables can cause Working On Loose Ground
electric shock. Maintain the safe distances
between the machine and the electric cable, as • Avoid operating the machine near cliffs,
listed below. overhangs, and deep ditches. If these areas
collapse, the machine could fall or tip over and
Voltage Minimum Safe Distance result in serious injury or death. Remember that
6.6 kV 3m 10 ft ground surfaces in these areas may be
weakened after heavy rain or blasting.
33.0 kV 4m 14 ft
• Freshly laid soil and the soil near ditches is loose.
66.0 kV 5m 17 ft
It can collapse under the weight or vibration of
154.0 kV 8m 27 ft the machine. Avoid these areas whenever
275.0 kV 10 m 33 ft possible.
Page 20-8
Parking The Machine • Batteries generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas

is very explosive and is easily ignited with a small
• Choose a horizontal road surface to park the spark or flame.
machine. If the machine has to be parked on a
slope, install wheel chocks to prevent the
machine from moving.
• When parking on public roads, provide fences
and signs, such as flags or lights, on the machine
to warn pedestrians and other vehicles. Ensure
that the machine, flags, or lights DO NOT
obstruct the traffic.
• Before leaving the machine, lower the dump
body fully, activate the parking brake, stop the
engine, and lock everything. Take the key with
you.
TOWING • Before working with the batteries, shut the engine

off and turn the key switch to the OFF position.
• Improper towing methods may lead to serious
personal injury and/or damage. • Avoid short-circuiting the battery terminals
through accidental contact with metallic objects,
• Use a towing device with ample strength for the such as tools, across the terminals.
weight of this machine.
• When removing or installing a battery, identify the
• DO NOT tow a machine on a slope. positive (+) terminal and negative (-) terminals.
• When connecting a machine to be towed, DO DO NOT short-circuit the terminals by touching
NOT allow anyone to go between the tow positive to negative.
machine and the disabled machine. • Tighten the battery caps securely.
• Set the coupling of the machine being towed in a • Tighten the battery terminals securely. Loose
straight line with the towing portion of the tow terminals can generate sparks and lead to an
machine. Secure it in position. explosion.
• DO NOT stand next to the towing device while
Jump-Starting With Booster Cables
the truck is moving.
For more towing information, refer to Section 30, • Wear safety glasses or goggles when connecting
booster cables.
Operating Instructions - Towing.
• While jump-starting with another machine, DO
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES NOT allow the two machines to touch.
Battery Hazard Prevention • Connect the positive (+)

cable first when installing
• Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid and can the booster cables.
quickly burn the skin and eat holes in clothing. If Disconnect the ground or
the electrolyte comes in contact with the skin, negative (-) cable first
immediately flush the area with water. during removal.
• Battery acid can cause blindness if splashed into • Connect the ground cable
the eyes. If acid gets into the eyes, flush them to the frame on the
immediately with large quantities of water. See a disabled machine. Connect the ground as far as
doctor immediately. possible from the battery.
• If acid is accidentally ingested, drink a large • Connect the batteries in parallel: positive to
quantity of water, milk, beaten eggs, or vegetable positive and negative to negative.
oil. Call a doctor or poison prevention center
• If any tool touches between the positive (+)
immediately.
terminal and the chassis, it will cause sparks.
• Wear safety glasses or goggles when working Use caution when using tools near the battery.
with batteries.
Page 20-9
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE Securing The Dump Body
Stopping The Engine Before Service

• Before performing inspections or maintenance,
stop the machine on firm, flat ground. Lower the
dump body, shut the engine off, and apply the Any time personnel are required to perform main-
parking brake. Install wheel chocks. tenance on the vehicle with the dump body in the
raised position, the body-up retention cable must
• If the engine must be operated during service,
move the selector switch to the NEUTRAL be installed.
position, and apply the parking brake. Perform
this work with two people. One person must sit in
the operator's seat to stop the engine, if
necessary. DO NOT move any controls during
these situations unless necessary for service.
• When servicing the machine, DO NOT touch any
moving parts. DO NOT wear loose clothing.
• When servicing the truck with the dump body
raised, place the dump lever in the HOLD
position. Install the body-up retention cable
securely.
Warning Tag
• DO NOT start the
engine or operate the
controls while a
person is performing
maintenance on the
truck. Serious injury
or death may result.
1. Rear Body Ear 3. Cable
• Attach a warning tag to the control lever in the 2. Cable Stored 4. Axle Housing Ear
operator's cab to alert others that you are Position
working on the machine. Attach additional
warning tags around the machine, if necessary.
• These tags are available from your Komatsu 1. To hold the dump body in the up position, raise
distributor. Part No. 09963-03000. the body to its maximum height.
Proper Tools 2. Remove cable (3) from its stored position on the
body, and install between rear body ear (1) and
• Use only tools suited to axle housing ear (4).
the task. Using damaged,
low quality, faulty, or 3. Secure the cable clevis pins with cotter pins.
makeshift tools can 4. Return the cable to stored position (2) after
cause personal injury. maintenance is complete.
• Extra precaution must be used when grinding,
welding, and using a sledgehammer.
Page 20-10
DURING MAINTENANCE Rules To Follow When Adding Fuel Or Oil
Personnel • Spilled fuel and oil may cause slipping. Clean up

spills immediately.
• Only authorized personnel may service and
repair the machine. • Tighten the fuel cap and the oil cap securely.
• DO NOT use fuel to wash parts.
Attachments
• Add fuel and oil in a well-ventilated area.
• Place attachments that
have been removed from
the machine in a safe
place. Secure the
attachments to prevent
them from falling.
Working Under The Machine
• Lower all movable work
equipment to the ground, or to
their lowest position, before
performing service under the
machine.
• Chock the tires of the machine securely.
• DO NOT work under the machine if the machine
is poorly supported.
Radiator Coolant Level
Keeping The Machine Clean
• If it is necessary to add
• Spilled oil or coolant to the radiator, shut
grease, scattered the engine off, and allow
tools, etc. can the engine and radiator to
cause you to slip or cool before adding the
trip. Keep your coolant.
machine clean and
tidy. • Depress the pressure relief button on the radiator
cap.
• If water gets into
the electrical system, the machine may move • Slowly loosen the cap to relieve the pressure
unexpectedly and/or damage to components during removal.
may occur. DO NOT use water or steam to clean
Use Of Lighting
any sensors, connectors, or the inside of the
operator's compartment. • When checking fuel, oil, coolant, or battery
• Use extreme care when washing the electrical electrolyte, use lighting with anti-explosion
control cabinet. DO NOT allow water to enter the specifications. If lighting without this protection is
control cabinet around the doors or vents. DO used, there is a danger of explosion.
NOT allow any water to enter the cooling air inlet
duct above the electrical control cabinet. If water
enters the control cabinet through any opening or
crevice, major damage to the electrical
components may occur.
• DO NOT spray water into the rear wheel electric
motor covers. Damage to the wheel motor
armatures may occur.
• DO NOT spray water into the retarding grids.
Excess water in the retarding grids can cause a
ground fault, which will prevent propulsion.
Page 20-11
Precautions With The Battery Maintenance Near High Temperatures And High
Pressures
• When repairing the
electrical system, or • Immediately after stopping, the
when arc welding, engine coolant and operating
remove the negative (-) oils are at high temperature and
terminal of the battery to may be pressurized. In these
stop the flow of current. conditions, opening the system
or replacing the filters, may
Handling High-Pressure result in burns or other injury. Wait for the
Hoses temperature to cool and the pressure to subside
before servicing.
• DO NOT bend or hit high-pressure hoses. DO
NOT use bent or cracked piping, tubes, or hoses. Rotating Fan And Belts
They may burst during use.
• Keep a safe distance from
• Repair any loose or broken hoses. Fuel and/or oil rotating parts, such as the
leaks may result in a fire. radiator fan and fan belts.
Precautions With High-Pressure Oil • Serious bodily injury may
result from direct or
• Hydraulic circuits may be pressurized. Ensure indirect contact with
that all pressure is released before loosening
rotating parts and flying objects.
hydraulic fittings or hoses.
• DO NOT service a system before completely Waste Materials
releasing the internal pressure.
• DO NOT dump oil or other
harmful fluids into a sewer
system, rivers, etc.
• Obey appropriate laws and
regulations when disposing
of harmful objects, such as
oil, fuel, coolant, solvent,
filters, batteries, and others.
• Small, high-pressure pinhole leaks are extremely • Drain fluids from your machine into the
dangerous. The jet of high-pressure oil can appropriate containers. DO NOT drain fluids
pierce the skin and eyes. Wear safety glasses directly onto the ground.
and thick gloves. Use a piece of cardboard or a
sheet of wood to check for oil leakage.
Page 20-12
TIRES Tire Maintenance
Handling Tires If the proper procedure for performing maintenance

or replacement of the wheel or tire is not used, the
Rim and tire maintenance can be hazardous unless the wheel or tire may burst, causing damage, serious
correct procedures are followed by trained personnel. injury, or even death. When performing such mainte-
Improperly maintained or inflated tires can overheat nance, consult your authorized regional Komatsu dis-
and burst due to excessive pressure. Improper infla- tributor, or the tire manufacturer.
tion can also result in cuts in the tire caused by sharp Refer to the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE),
stones. Both of these conditions can lead to tire dam- SAE J1337, Off-Road Rim Maintenance Procedures
age, serious personal injury, or even death. and Service Precautions, Section 4.2 for additional
To safely maintain a tire, adhere to the following con- information on demounting the tires and rim assem-
ditions: blies. Also, refer to Section 4.4 of SAE J1337 for
assembly and inflation recommendations.
• Inflate the tires to their specified pressure.
Abnormal heat is generated, particularly when The U.S. Department of Labor Mine Safety and Health
the inflation pressure is too low. Administration (MSHA) addresses tire repairs in its Title
30 Code of Federal Regulations, 30 CFR 57.14104.
NOTE: To prevent injury from the wheel rims during
tire inflation, use one of the following:
1. A wheel cage or other restraining device that
will constrain all wheel rim components during
an explosive separation of a multi-piece wheel DO NOT stand in front of a rim and locking ring
rim, or during the sudden release of air. when inflating a tire mounted on the machine.
Observers must not be permitted in the area.
2. A stand-off inflation device which permits a per-
son to stand outside of the potential trajectory of DO NOT weld or heat the rim assembly with the tire
the wheel components. mounted on the rim. Resulting gases inside the tire
may ignite, causing explosion of the tire and rim.
• Use the specified tires.
The tire inflation pressure and permissible speeds, Storing Tires After Removal
given in this manual, are general values. The actual
• As a basic rule, store the tires in a warehouse in
values may differ, depending on the type of tire and which unauthorized persons cannot enter. If the
the specific operating conditions. For details, please tires are stored outside, erect a fence around the
consult the tire manufacturer. tires with No Entry and other warning signs.
When the tires become overheated, a flammable gas • Stand the tire on level ground, and block it
is produced inside the tire which can ignite. It is par- securely so that it cannot roll or fall over.
ticularly dangerous if the tires become overheated
• If the tire falls, flee the area as quickly as
while the tires are pressurized. If the gas generated possible. The tires for mining equipment are
inside the tire ignites, the internal pressure will sud- extremely heavy. DO NOT attempt to hold a tire
denly rise, and the tire will explode, resulting in dan- upright when the tire is falling. The weight of
ger and/or death to personnel in the area. Explosions these tires may lead to serious injury or death.
differ from punctures or tire bursts because the
destructive force of the explosion is extremely large.
Therefore, the following operations are strictly pro-
hibited when the tire is pressurized:
• Welding the rim.
• Welding near the wheel or tire.
• Smoking or creating open
flames.
Mounted tires stored as spares must be inflated to
the minimum inflation pressure necessary to keep
the tire beads properly seated. Maximum inflation
pressure of the stored tire must, in no instance,
exceed 15% of the tire’s cold inflation pressure.
Page 20-13
ADDITIONAL JOB SITE RULES

• Use this space to add any additional job site rules not covered in any of the previous discussions.
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
• _______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 20-14
WHEN REPAIRS ARE NECESSARY

1. Only qualified maintenance personnel, who 9. If the truck is to be towed for any reason, use a
understand the systems being repaired, must rigid tow bar. Check the truck cab for decals for
attempt repairs. special towing precautions. Refer to Section 30,
2. Many components on the Komatsu truck are Operating Instructions - Towing.
large and heavy. Ensure that the lifting equip- 10. Drain, clean, and ventilate the fuel tanks and/or
ment - hoists, slings, chains, lifting eyes - are of hydraulic tanks before welding.
adequate capacity.
NOTE: If it is necessary to weld the hydraulic tank or
3. DO NOT stand under a suspended load. DO fuel tank, drain, clean, and ventilate the tank(s)
NOT work under the raised body unless the before welding.
body safety cable is in place to hold the body in
the up position.
4. DO NOT service the truck while the engine is
on, except when absolutely necessary. Keep a
safe distance from moving parts.
5. When servicing the air conditioning system, Pressurized hydraulic fluid may penetrate the
wear a face shield and cold-resistant gloves for skin. Serious injury and possibly death may
protection against frostbite. Follow all current result if the proper medical treatment by a physi-
regulations for handling and recycling refriger- cian familiar with this injury is not received
ants. immediately.
6. Follow the package directions carefully when 11. Relieve system pressure before disconnecting
using cleaning solvents. hoses or components.
7. If an auxiliary battery assist is needed, first use
12. After adjustments or repairs, replace all shields,
one cable to connect the 24V positive (+) post
screens, and clamps.
of the disabled truck batteries to the 24V posi-
tive (+) post of the auxiliary assist. Use the sec- 13. Working near tires can be dangerous. Use
ond cable to connect the 24V negative (-) post extreme caution when working around tires.
of the auxiliary assist battery to a frame ground Refer to Tires earlier in this chapter.
(-) on the disabled truck away from the battery. 14. Only a qualified operator may operate the truck
8. Disconnect the positive and negative battery in the repair facility or during road testing.
cables before arc welding on the truck. Failure to
do so may seriously damage the battery and the
electrical equipment. Disconnect the battery
charging alternator lead wire and isolate the elec-
tronic control components before making the
welding repairs. It is not necessary to disconnect
or remove any control circuit cards or any of the
Alarm Indicating Device (AID) circuit control
cards.
Fasten the welding machine ground (-) lead to
the piece being welded; the grounding clamp
must be attached as near as possible to the
weld area. DO NOT allow welding current to
pass through the ball bearings, roller bearings,
suspensions, or hydraulic cylinders. Avoid lay-
ing the welding cables over or near the vehicle
electrical harnesses. The welding voltage could
be induced into the electrical harness and
cause damage to the components.
Page 20-15
Page 20-16
NOTES
OM2216 Safety - Section 22
Warnings and Cautions Page 22-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following pages provide a brief explanation of the warning, caution, and service instruction plates and decals
attached to the truck. The plates and decals listed here are typical of this model. Because of customer options,
individual trucks may have plates and decals that are different from those shown here.
The plates and decals must be kept clean and legible. If any decal or plate is illegible or damaged, it must be
replaced with a new one.
CL - Character position 9 identifies the Check Letter
(CL). The CL is used to verify the accuracy of the
individual PIN.
FC - Character positions 10 and 11 identify the Fac-

tory Code (FC). The FC identifies the Komatsu fac-
tory in charge of claims for the product. The FC for
electric drive trucks is 61.
SN - Character positions 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17

identify the Serial Number (SN). The SN is a unique
A product identification plate is located on the frame sequential number.
in front of the right side front wheel. It shows the truck
model number, maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW), and Product Identification Number (PIN).
The PIN consists of 19 total characters. The first and

last characters are tamper preventative symbols (*).
The remaining 17 alpha/numeric characters are used
to identify five characteristics of the machine. The A grade/speed plate is located on the left front post of
five characteristics are detailed below. the operator's cab. The decal provides the recom-
mended maximum speeds to be used when
descending various grades with a loaded truck.
WMC - Character positions 1, 2, and 3 identify the
Worldwide Manufacturer Code (WMC). The WMC Refer to the decal in the operator's cab. This decal
designates the manufacturer of the product. Komatsu may change with the optional truck equipment.
brand products are identified with the letters KMT.
MDS - Character positions 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 identify

the Machine Descriptor Section (MDS). The MDS
code identifies general information regarding
machine specifications. The MDS is a code for the
machine type and model.
Safety - Section 22 OM2216
Page 22-2 Warnings and Cautions
A warning decal surrounds the key switch. The warn-

ing stresses the importance of reading the operator's
manual before operation.
Warning plates are attached to the hydraulic tank
and the fuel tank. The decals alert technicians not to
work on the truck with the body raised unless the
body-up retention cable is in position.
A plate attached to the right rear corner of the cab

states the Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) and
Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) meet var-
ious SAE performance requirements.
Warning plates are mounted on the truck frame in

DO NOT make modifications to the ROPS compo- front of and to the rear of both front tires. The decal
nents. DO NOT attempt to repair damage without alerts all persons to remain at a distance when the
written approval from the manufacturer. Unau- truck is being started.
thorized repairs will void certification.
A warning plate is mounted on top of the radiator

surge tank cover near the radiator cap. The engine A plate on the side of the hydraulic tank provides
cooling system is pressurized when the engine is on instructions for filling the hydraulic tank.
and/or when the system is hot. Turn the engine off Keep the system open to the atmosphere only as
and allow the engine to cool before removing the long as necessary to lessen the chances of system
radiator cap. Release the internal pressure by contamination. Service the tank with clean type C-4
depressing the pressure relief. Unless the pressure hydraulic oil. All oil being put into the hydraulic tank
is first released, removing the radiator cap will result must be filtered to three microns.
in the hot coolant being expelled from the radiator.
Serious scalding and burning can result.
This danger plate is attached to each suspension

and steering accumulator. These plates warn that the
suspension and accumulators are charged with high-
A caution decal is attached below the hydraulic tank pressure nitrogen. Read the service manual, and fol-
oil level sight gauge. Check the oil level with the body low the safety procedures when performing service
down, engine stopped, and the key switch OFF. on these components.
Refer to the filling instructions outlined in Section 40,
Lubrication and Service. Instructions are also out-
lined on the following decal.
A warning plate is attached to the frame above the

hydraulic system Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) quick Attached to the exterior of the battery compartment is
disconnect fittings. The plate alerts technicians that a danger plate. This plate stresses the prevention of
high-pressure hydraulic oil is present during opera- sparks near the battery. When another battery or
tion. Use caution when opening the hydraulic sys- 24VDC power source is used for auxiliary power, all
tem. There is a chance of residual pressure being switches must be OFF prior to connecting. Maintain
present. Loosen the fittings slowly to allow pressure correct polarity: connect the positive (+) posts
to dissipate before removing any connections. together and then connect the negative (-) lead of the
auxiliary power cable to a good frame ground. DO
NOT connect to the negative posts of the truck bat-
teries. DO NOT connect near the battery box. These
precautions minimize the danger of sparks near the
batteries.
Pressurized hydraulic fluid may penetrate the Sulfuric acid is corrosive, toxic, and explosive. Use
skin. Serious injury and death may result if safety goggles, rubber gloves, and a rubber apron
proper medical treatment from a physician famil- when working near batteries.
iar with this injury is not received immediately. If battery electrolyte is splashed into the eyes or is
ingested, get the proper medical attention immediately.
This plate is located on the battery box near the bat-

tery disconnect switches, and indicates that the bat-
tery system is a negative ground system.
A warning instruction is located below the parking

brake and brake lock switches, which are located to
These decals are placed above the battery discon- the right of the steering column on the instrument
nect switches on the right side of the front bumper to panel. Pushing the top of the rocker-style switch
indicate the OFF and ON positions of the switches. turns the function ON; pushing the bottom, turns it
OFF.
The parking brake is spring-applied and hydraulically Before arc welding on the truck, disconnect the posi-
released. It is designed to hold a stationary truck tive and negative battery cables of the vehicle. Fail-
when the engine is off. The truck must be completely ure to do so may seriously damage the battery and
stopped before applying the parking brake, or dam- electrical equipment. Disconnect the battery charging
age may occur to the parking brake. To apply the alternator lead wire and isolate the electronic control
parking brake, press the rocker switch toward the ON components before welding. It is not necessary to
symbol. To release the parking brake, press the disconnect or remove any control circuit cards or any
rocker switch toward the OFF symbol. When the key of the Alarm Indicating Device (AID) circuit control
switch is ON and the parking brake switch is applied, cards.
parking brake indicator light (A3, overhead panel) will
Fasten the welding machine ground (-) lead to the
be illuminated.
piece being welded. The grounding clamp must be
NOTE: DO NOT use the parking brake when loading attached as near as possible to the weld area. DO
or dumping. With the key switch ON and the engine NOT allow welding current to pass through the ball
on, sudden shock caused by loading or dumping bearings, roller bearings, suspensions, or hydraulic
could cause the system’s motion sensor to release cylinders. DO NOT lay welding cables over or near
the parking brake. the vehicle electrical harnesses. The welding voltage
could be induced into the electrical harness and pos-
The brake lock switch is for holding the truck while
sibly cause damage to the components.
parked at the shovel during loading or while dump-
ing. It applies the rear service brakes only. If the
brake pedal malfunctions while the truck is in motion,
apply the brake lock to stop the truck. DO NOT use
this brake as a parking brake when leaving the truck.
With the engine off, the hydraulic system will depres-
surize, releasing the service brakes.
This plate is mounted on the top side of the blown

grid housings. Stepping or standing here may result
in serious personal injury.
High voltage danger plates and caution plates are

attached to the doors of the electrical control cabinet.
The high voltage plate is also attached to the blown
grid housing, extended range housing, rectifier hous-
ing, inlet duct, and rear hatch cover.
This plate warns the technician to stop the engine,

before loosening or disconnecting a brake line. Turn
A decal plate is located on top of the center cross the key switch off, and open the drain valves on all
tube. The decal provides the operator or technician three accumulators to bleed the hydraulic pressure.
with the hook-up procedure for dumping a loaded,
disabled truck, by using a functional truck for hydrau-
lic power.
Refer to the service manual for additional instructions
for using this procedure.
Warning and danger plates are located inside the

This plate is placed near the four jacking points on
door of the brake system cabinet behind the cab.
the truck. Two are placed at the front of the truck next
This plate alerts technicians to read the warning to the right and left frame upright supports. Two are
labels attached to the accumulators prior to releasing placed at the rear of the truck under the right and left
internal nitrogen pressure, or disconnecting any suspension supports.
hydraulic lines or hardware.
A wheel motor oil level decal is attached to the gear

cover on both the electric wheel motors. This decal
stresses that the truck must be on a level surface and
parked for 20 minutes prior to checking the oil level.
This is necessary in order to get an accurate reading.
This plate is located below the left-hand battery box.

It identifies the emergency engine shutdown switch.
This switch is spring-loaded to the OFF position. It
must be held in the ON position until the engine
stops.
This plate is located on the battery equalizer box.

After the key switch is turned OFF, allow at least 90
seconds of time to pass before opening (disconnect-
ing) the battery disconnect switch. This time period
allows hydraulic pressure to be released from the
steering accumulators.
A warning plate is located above the hydraulic sys-

tem (APU) quick disconnect fittings in front of the
hydraulic tank. The plate provides instructions to the
operator or technician for towing a disabled truck.
This plate specifies the requirements for an auxiliary
source of supply for hydraulic oil and the proper
hook-up.
Ensure the steering and brake systems are operating
properly before towing the truck.
This plate is located on the battery equalizer box.
When the battery disconnect lever is in the left-hand
position, it disconnects power (opens the circuit) from
the batteries to the truck. When the lever is in the
right-hand position, it connects (closes the circuit)
from the batteries to the truck.
The lubrication chart is located on the right-hand side of the radiator grille. The chart specifies some of the critical
maintenance items to be checked. Component location and service intervals are specified on the chart. The lube
key lists the proper lubricants to be used. Refer to Section 40, Lubrication and Service, for more information on
maintenance items.
OM3043 06/06 Operation - Section 30
Operating Instructions Page 30-1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
PREPARING FOR OPERATION 2. Move behind the front left tire. Check the hub
and brake assemblies for leaks, and any abnor-
The safest trucks are those which have been prop-
mal wear or signs of damage.
erly prepared for operation. At the beginning of each
Check the oil level in the front wheel hub sight
shift, a careful inspection of the truck must be com-
gauge. Refill, if necessary.
pleted by the operator before starting the engine.
3. With the engine stopped, check the engine oil
SAFETY IS THINKING AHEAD level. If necessary, use the service light to illu-
minate the area. Ensure the light is turned off
Prevention is the best way to avoid an accident. Pre-
when the inspection of this area is complete.
vent potential accidents by knowing the employer's
safety requirements and all necessary job site regu- 4. Inspect the fan and air conditioner belts for cor-
lations. In addition, know the proper use and care of rect tension and tracking. Also, check for belt
all the safety equipment on the truck. Operators or wear or damage.
technicians must be qualified to operate or maintain Verify the fan guard bolts are installed and
a Komatsu truck. properly tightened.
Safe practices start before the operator gets to the 5. Ensure the anchor end of the steering cylinder
truck! Refer to Section 20, General Safety, for safety pin is properly greased and tightened.
guidelines. 6. Move outboard of the front wheel and inspect
the attaching lugs/wedges to ensure they are
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION properly tightened. Replace any parts that are
At the beginning of each shift, perform a careful walk- missing.
around inspection of the truck before engine start-up. Inspect the tires for damage. Check for proper
A walk-around inspection is a ground level check of inflation.
the truck and its components to ensure the truck is
7. Move behind the rear of the front wheel. Ensure
safe to operate.
the suspension protective boot is in good condi-
Start at the left front corner of the truck (see illustration. Verify all suspension attaching hardware
tion, next page.) Move in a counterclockwise direc- bolts are completely tightened. Inspect the
tion, around the truck, and back to the starting point. mounting key area for evidence of wear. Verify
the suspension extension (exposed piston rod)
Inspection of the truck before every shift can help
is correct. Check for leaks.
avoid many potential problems. Downtime and loss of
production can be reduced by scheduled maintenance. Check for leaks around the hub and brakes.
Also, check for any unusual wear conditions or
Local work practices may prevent an operator from
damage.
performing all tasks suggested here. To the extent
permitted, the operator must follow this or a similar Ensure the rod end of the steering cylinder is
routine. properly greased. Verify all mounting hardware
1. Start at the left front of the truck. During the is properly tightened. Check for any hydraulic
walk-around inspection, visually inspect all leaks.
lights and safety equipment for external dam-
age. Ensure all light housing lenses are clean
and unbroken.
Empty the dust pans on the left side air clean-
ers. Ensure the battery box covers are in place
and securely fastened.
Operation - Section 30 OM3043 06/06
Page 30-2 Operating Instructions
8. Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank. With the 15. Move to the rear center of the truck. Open the
engine stopped and the body down, hydraulic rear hatch cover, and turn on the work light, if
fluid must be visible in the upper sight glass. necessary. Inspect the condition of the hatch
9. Verify all hydraulic tank shut off valves are cover gasket. Inspect the housing for any for-
locked in the fully open position. eign objects or misplaced tools.
10. Move around the hydraulic tank in front of the rear Check for leaks around the mounting surface of
dual tires. the rear housing wheel motor and any brake
hose fittings.
Inspect the hoist cylinder for any damage or
hydraulic oil leaks. Verify the covers on the wheel motor sump are
firmly attached. Turn off the work light, if used,
Verify the lower guard is in place. and close and latch the rear hatch cover.
Ensure both the upper and lower hoist cylinder 16. While standing in front of the rear hatch, verify
pins are properly tightened and greased. the rear lights and back-up horns are working.
11. Inspect the lower edge of the chassis. Inspect the panhard rod for proper lubrication.
Also, inspect both body hinge pins for damage
Ensure the blower hose is in good condition and proper lubrication.
with no holes or breakage.
17. Inspect the right rear suspension for damage.
Check the main hydraulic pumps for leakage. Verify all suspension attaching hardware is
Check for other unusual conditions with the completely tightened.
pumps or the pump drive shaft. Verify the suspension is properly charged.
12. Move around the left side dual tires. Inspect the Ensure there are no leaks. Verify the suspen-
attaching lugs/wedges to ensure they are prop- sions are properly greased. Verify the cover
erly tightened. Replace any parts that are miss- over the chromed piston rod is in good condi-
ing. tion.
Inspect the wheel cover for cracks or damage. 18. Move behind the rear right side dual tires.
Verify the latches are properly fastened. Inspect Check for and remove any rocks lodged
the area for any oil leakage from inside the between the dual tires. To prevent tire damage,
wheel cover (could indicate brake or wheel verify the rock ejector is in good condition and
motor leakage. straight.
Inspect the dual tires for damage. Verify proper 19. Move around the right side dual tires. Inspect the
inflation pressure. If the truck has been operat- attaching lugs/wedges to ensure they are properly
ing with low tire pressure, the tire must be tightened. Replace any parts that are missing.
cooled before parking the truck inside.
Inspect the wheel cover for cracks or damage.
13. Move to the rear of the dual tires. Check for and Verify the latches are properly fastened. Inspect
remove any rocks lodged between the dual the area for any oil leakage from inside the
tires. To prevent tire damage, verify the rock wheel cover (could indicate brake or wheel
ejector is in good condition and straight. motor leakage.
14. Inspect the left rear suspension for damage. Inspect the dual tires for damage. Verify proper
Verify all suspension attaching hardware is inflation pressure. If the truck has been operat-
completely tightened. ing with low tire pressure, the tire must be
Verify the suspension is properly charged. cooled before parking the truck inside.
Ensure there are no leaks. Verify the suspen- 20. Move in front of the right side dual tires.
sions are properly greased. Verify the cover
over the chromed piston rod is in good condi- Inspect the hoist cylinder for any damage or
tion. hydraulic oil leaks. Verify the lower guard is in
place. Ensure both the upper and lower hoist cyl-
inder pins are properly tightened and greased.
Check the secureness and condition of the
body-up limit switch. Remove any mud/dirt
accumulation from the switch.
26. Move to the front of the radiator.

21. Move to the fuel tank.
Remove any debris or foreign objects.
Verify the fuel gauge on the tank agrees with
the gauge in the cab. Check for coolant leaks.
Inspect the tank mounting connections to the Inspect all headlights and fog lights for damage.
frame. Ensure they are tight and not damaged. Verify all lights are working.
22. Move behind the right side front wheel. 27. Verify the ground level engine shutdown switch
and battery disconnect switches are in the ON
Ensure the suspension protective boot is in position.
good condition. Verify all suspension attaching
hardware bolts are completely tightened. 28. Clean the stairs, ladder, and/or handrails of any
Inspect the mounting key area for evidence of foreign material, such as ice, snow, oil, or mud.
wear. Verify the suspension extension (exposed
piston rod) is correct. Check for leaks.
Check for leaks around the hub and brakes.
Also, check for any unusual wear conditions or Use the handrails when mounting or dismounting
damage. the truck. Always face the truck when using the
ladders. DO NOT mount or dismount the truck
Ensure the rod end of the steering cylinder is while it is in motion.
properly greased. Verify all mounting hardware is
properly tightened. Check for any hydraulic leaks. 29. Check the coolant in the radiator using the coolant
level sight gauge, or observe the coolant level
23. Move outboard of the front wheel, and inspect through the opening in the end of the hood.
the attaching lugs/wedges to ensure they are
properly tightened. Replace any parts that are If it is necessary to remove the radiator cap, shut
missing. the engine off, allow the engine to cool, and slowly
remove the radiator cap. DO NOT remove the
Inspect the tires for damage. Check for proper radiator cap when the cooling system is pressur-
inflation. ized.
24. Inspect the engine compartment for any leaks or
unusual conditions.
Inspect the fan guard and belts for excessive
wear or damage. If the engine is hot, allow the coolant to cool
before removing the fill cap or draining the radia-
Remove any foreign objects or debris from tor. Serious burns may result if the coolant is not
behind the radiator. allowed to cool.
Inspect the auto lube system. See Lubrication 30. Inspect the covers over the braking grids to
and Maintenance, Section 40, for specific ensure the latches are securely fastened.
details concerning the auto lube system.
Inspect the main air inlet to ensure it is clear of
If used, turn the work light off and secure the all foreign objects and debris that would prevent
ladder in a stored position. complete air flow into the inlet.
25. Move around to the right front of the truck. Verify all the cabinet door latches are securely
Remove the air cleaner pans and remove any fastened.
dirt buildup. Reinstall and securely attach the 31. Move around the cab to the back.
pans.
Open the doors to the brake cabinet and check
Inspect the battery box cover for damage. Verify for any hydraulic oil leaks
it is securely attached.
If used, turn the work light off.
Close the door and verify the latches are
securely fastened.
32. Clean the cab windows and mirrors. NOTE: If the truck is equipped with an engine
prelube system, a noticeable time delay will occur
Remove dirt or debris from the cab floor.
(while the engine lube oil passages are being filled)
Ensure the steering wheel, controls, and pedals
before the starter engages. The colder the engine oil
are free of any oil, grease, or mud.
temperature, the longer the time delay. In addition, if
33. Store any personal gear in the cab so it does the truck is equipped with an engine starting aid for
not interfere with the operation of the truck. DO cold weather starting, the engine prelube system
NOT carry tools or supplies in the cab of the must be engaged for 5-10 seconds, or until the
truck or on the deck. starter is engaged, before activating the engine
34. Adjust the seat and steering wheel so that it is starting aid.
comfortable for use.
35. Read and understand the Operator Controls and
Instrument Panel discussion in this section. Be
familiar with all the control locations and functions Starting fluid is extremely volatile and flammable!
before operating the truck. Use with extreme care.
If the truck is equipped with the optional engine start-
ENGINE START-UP
ing aid and the ambient temperature is below 10°C
1. Ensure all personnel are clear of the truck (50°F), turn the key switch to the START position.
before starting the engine. Sound the horn as a While cranking the engine, move the engine starting
warning before actuating any operational con- aid switch to the ON position for three seconds maxi-
trols. If the truck is in an enclosure, ensure ade- mum, then release the engine starting aid. If the
quate ventilation before start-up. Exhaust fumes engine does not start, wait at least fifteen seconds
are dangerous! before repeating the procedure.
2. Ensure the parking brake switch is in the ON
DO NOT crank an electric starter for more than thirty
position. The selector switch must be in NEU-
seconds at one time. Allow two minutes for cooling
TRAL before starting the truck.
before attempting to start the engine again. Severe
3. If the truck is equipped with auxiliary cold damage to the starter motor can result from over-
weather heaters, DO NOT start the engine heating.
while the heaters are on. Damage to the coolant
heaters will result. AFTER ENGINE HAS STARTED
4. The key switch is a three position (OFF, RUN, 1. Become thoroughly familiar with the steering
START) switch. When the switch is rotated one and emergency controls. After the engine has
position clockwise, it is in the RUN position and all started and the low pressure and warning sys-
electrical circuits (except START) are activated. tems are normal, test the truck steering in
With the selector switch in NEUTRAL, rotate the extreme right and left directions. If the steering
key switch fully clockwise to the START position system is not operating properly, shut the
and hold this position until the engine starts. The engine off immediately. Determine the steering
START position is spring loaded to return to RUN system problem and repair before resuming
when the key is released. operation.
2. Check the brakes before moving the truck. Start
the engine and allow the hydraulic system to
fully pressurize. Activate the service brake,
parking brake, and brake lock at least twice. If a
warning alarm is activated when a brake is
applied or released, DO NOT operate the truck.
If the application and release of any brake
appears slow or improper, DO NOT operate the
truck. If a brake problem is suspected, shut the
engine off and notify maintenance personnel.
3. Check the gauges, warning lights, and instru- 1. Look to the rear before backing the truck.
ments before moving the truck to ensure proper Watch for and obey the ground spotter's hand
system operation and proper instrument func- signals before reversing. Sound the warning
tioning. Observe the braking and steering circuit horn three times. The spotter must have a clear
hydraulic warning lights. If the warning lights view of the total area at the rear of the truck.
come on, shut the engine off immediately and 2. Operate the truck only while properly seated
determine the cause. with the seat belt fastened. Keep hands and
4. Ensure the headlights, work lights, and taillights feet inside the cab compartment while the truck
are in proper working order. Good visibility may is in operation.
prevent an accident. Check the operation of the 3. Check the gauges and instruments frequently
windshield wipers. during operation for proper readings.
5. When the truck body is in the dump position, 4. Observe all regulations pertaining to the job
DO NOT allow anyone beneath it unless the site's traffic pattern. Be alert to any unusual traf-
body-up retaining pin or cable is in place. fic pattern. Obey the spotter's signals.
6. DO NOT allow unauthorized personnel to ride 5. Match the truck speed to the haul road condi-
in the truck. DO NOT allow anyone to ride on tions. Slow the truck in congested areas. Keep a
the stairs or ladder of the truck. firm grip on the steering wheel at all times.
7. DO NOT leave the truck unattended while the 6. DO NOT allow the engine to idle for extended
engine is on. Shut the engine off, and apply the periods of time.
parking brake before getting out of the cab.
7. Check the parking brake periodically during the
shift while the truck is stopped. Use the parking
MACHINE OPERATION SAFETY
brake only for parking. DO NOT use the parking
PRECAUTIONS
brake for loading/dumping.
After the truck engine is started and all the systems are
functioning properly, the operator must follow all the
local safety rules to ensure safe machine operation.
DO NOT use the brake lock for parking. With the

engine stopped, hydraulic pressure will bleed-
down, allowing the brakes to release!
If any of the red warning lights come on, or if any
gauge reads in the red area during truck opera- 8. Check the brake lock performance periodically
tion, a malfunction is indicated. Stop the truck as for safe loading and dumping.
soon as safety permits, shut the engine off, and
have the problem corrected before resuming 9. Proceed slowly on rough terrain to avoid deep
truck operation. ruts or large obstacles. Avoid traveling close to
the soft edges and the edge of the fill area.
10. Truck operation requires concentrated effort by
the driver. Avoid distractions of any kind while
operating the truck.
Operating the truck with stalled or free spinning 11. Before driving the truck, ensure the tires are
wheel motors may cause serious damage to the properly inflated. If the truck has been driven
wheel motors! If the truck does not begin to move with an under-inflated tire, do not park the truck
within 10 seconds after depressing the throttle inside a building until the tire has cooled to
pedal (selector switch in a drive position), release ambient temperature.
the throttle pedal. Allow the wheels to regain trac-
tion before accelerating the engine again.
LOADING 6. DO NOT stop or park on a haul road unless

1. Pull into the loading area with caution. Remain unavoidable. If you must stop, move the truck to
at a safe distance while the truck ahead is being a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shut
loaded. the engine off before leaving the cab. Chock the
wheels securely, and notify maintenance per-
2. DO NOT drive over unprotected power cables. sonnel for assistance.
3. When approaching or leaving a loading area, 7. Before starting up or down a grade, maintain a
watch for other vehicles and for personnel work- speed that will ensure safe driving and provide
ing in the area. effective retarding. Refer to the grade/speed
4. When pulling in under a loader or shovel, follow decal in the operator's cab.
the spotter or shovel operator signals. The truck 8. When operating the truck in darkness, or when
operator may speed up loading by observing the visibility is poor, DO NOT move the truck unless
location and loading cycle of the truck being all the headlights, clearance lights, and tail
loaded ahead. Then follow a similar pattern. lights are on. DO NOT back the truck if the
5. When the truck is being loaded, the operator back-up horn or lights are inoperative. Dim the
must stay in the truck cab with the engine on. headlights when meeting oncoming vehicles.
Place the selector switch in NEUTRAL, and 9. If the emergency steering light and/or low brake
apply the brake lock. pressure warning light illuminate during opera-
6. When loaded, drive away from the shovel tion, immediately steer the truck to a safe stop-
quickly, but with extreme caution. ping area, away from other traffic.
10. The Statex III w/fuel enhancement system mon-
HAULING
itors wheel motor, ambient, and static exciter
1. Stay alert! Drive with extreme caution. Cab doors temperatures. If any one of these values is out-
must remain closed at all times if the truck is in side the limits established, the Statex III con-
motion or unattended. trols will cause the engine to increase to 1650
2. Obey all road signs. Operate the truck in a con- rpm. Normal engine rpm for haul road/retarding
trolled manner. Govern the truck speed by the operation is 1250 rpm.
road conditions, weather, and visibility. Report
11. When the maximum truck speed is reached,
haul road conditions immediately. Muddy or icy
haul trucks equipped with Statex III w/fuel
roads, pot holes, or other obstructions can
enhancement (fuel saver) system will experi-
present hazards.
ence a decrease in engine rpm.
3. When backing the truck, give the back-up signal
three sounds of the horn. When starting for- NOTE: This is different from trucks equipped with
ward, two sounds of the horn. These signals Statex II or Statex III without fuel enhancement,
must be given each time the truck is moved for- which increase rpm upon reaching the speed limit.
ward or backward.
4. Use extreme caution when approaching a haul
road intersection. Maintain a safe distance from PASSING
oncoming vehicles. 1. DO NOT pass another truck on a hill or blind
5. Maintain a safe distance of 15 m (50 ft) when curve!
following another vehicle. When driving down- 2. Before passing, ensure the road ahead is clear.
hill, maintain a distance of 30 m (100 ft). If a disabled truck is blocking your lane, slow
down and pass with extreme caution.
3. Use only the areas designated for passing.
DUMPING
1. Approach the dump area with extreme caution.
Ensure the area is clear of persons and
obstructions, including overhead utility lines.
Obey signals directed by the spotter, if present. If dumping very large rocks or sticky material, as
Avoid unstable areas. Stay a safe distance from described in the warning, slowly accelerate the
the edge of the dump area. Position the truck on engine rpm to raise the body. When the material
a solid, level surface before dumping. starts to move, release the hoist lever to the HOLD
position. If the material does not continue to exit
the body, repeat this procedure as necessary.
6. Reduce the engine rpm as the last stage of the
hoist cylinder begins to extend. Let the engine
As the body raises, the truck center of gravity will go to low idle as the last stage reaches half-
move. The truck must be on a level surface to extension.
prevent tipping/rolling!
2. Carefully maneuver the truck into the dump posi-
tion. When backing the truck into the dump posi-
tion, use only the brake pedal to stop and hold the
truck. DO NOT rely on the wheel brake lock to
stop the truck. This control is unmodulated and
applies the rear service brakes only.
3. When the truck is stopped and in the dump
position, apply the wheel brake lock. Move the
selector switch to the NEUTRAL position.
To Raise The Dump Body:
FIGURE 30-1. HOIST LEVER POSITIONS

7. Release the hoist lever as the last stage of the
Dumping certain types of material can result in hoist cylinder reaches full extension.
sudden and violent movement of the truck. This
truck movement may cause injury to the opera- To Lower The Dump Body:
tor. It may also cause damage to the hoist cylin- (When dumping over a berm or into a crusher):
ders, frame, and/or body hinge pins. Use caution 8. Move the hoist lever forward to the DOWN posi-
when dumping large rocks (10% of payload, or tion and release. Releasing the lever places the
greater) to prevent the load from shifting too hoist control valve in the FLOAT position, allow-
quickly. Sticky material (loads that do not flow ing the body to return to the frame.
freely from the body) may also cause sudden
truck movement if the load releases quickly.
4. Move the lever to the HOIST position. Refer to
Fig. 30-1. Releasing the lever while in the HOIST
position will cause the lever to move to the HOLD DO NOT drive forward in the
position. fully raised position if the
5. Raise the engine rpm to accelerate the hoist dump body will not clear an
speed. obstacle, such as a crusher
wall. DO NOT move the truck with a raised dump
body raised except in an emergency. Failure to
lower the body before moving the truck may
cause damage to the hoist cylinders, frame, and/
or body hinge pins.
NOTE: If the dumped material builds up at the rear of
the truck and the body cannot be lowered, perform
the following steps:
a. Move the hoist lever back to the HOIST posi- NOTE: If the dumped material builds up at the rear
tion and fully raise the dump body. Continue of the body and the body cannot be lowered, then
to hold the hoist lever until the body is com- perform steps c and d below:
pletely raised. c. Move the hoist lever back to the HOIST posi-
NOTE: If the body is not completely raised, it may tion to fully raise the dump body. Then
lower very rapidly when the truck is moved forward release the hoist lever so it returns to the
and the material is cleared from the rear of the truck. HOLD position.
b. Once the body is fully raised, release the d. Shift the selector switch to forward, release
hoist lever (it will return to the HOLD posi- the brake lock, and depress the override but-
tion). ton. Drive forward to clear the material. Stop,
shift the selector switch to NEUTRAL, and
c. Shift the selector switch to FORWARD,
apply the brake lock. Lower the body again.
release the brake lock, and press the over-
ride button.
d. Slowly drive forward to clear the material. NOTE: Failure to hoist the body, after making an
e. Once the material is cleared, stop the truck, unsuccessful attempt at lowering the body, may
place the selector switch in NEUTRAL, and result in the dump body suddenly lowering after the
apply the brake lock. truck has pulled ahead of the material that was
previously preventing the body from lowering.
f. Completely lower the body.
NOTE: Failure to hoist the body, after making an
unsuccessful attempt at lowering the body, may
result in the dump body suddenly lowering after the
truck has pulled ahead of the material that was
previously preventing the body from lowering. DO NOT move the truck with a
raised dump body raised
To Lower The Dump Body except in an emergency. Fail-
(When dumping on flat ground): ure to lower the body before
9. It is very likely when dumping on flat ground moving the truck may cause damage to the hoist
that the dumped material will prevent the body cylinders, frame, and/or body hinge pins.
from lowering. In this instance, the truck will 10. With the body returned to the frame, move the
have to be driven forward a short distance (just selector switch to FORWARD, release the
enough to clear the material) before the body can brake lock, and exit the dump area carefully.
be lowered.
a. Shift the selector switch to FORWARD, TOWING
release the brake lock, and depress the Prior to towing a truck, many factors must be care-
override button. Drive forward enough for the fully considered. Serious personal injury and/or sig-
body to clear the material. Stop, shift the nificant property damage may result if important
selector switch to NEUTRAL, and apply the safety practices, procedures, and preparation for
brake lock. moving heavy equipment are not observed.
b. Move the hoist lever forward to the DOWN DO NOT tow the truck any faster than 8 kph (5 mph).
position and release. Releasing the lever
A disabled machine may be towed after adhering to
places the hoist control valve in the FLOAT
the following minimum precautions.
position, allowing the body to return to the
frame. 1. Shut the engine off. Chock wheels on disabled
truck to prevent movement while attaching tow
bar.
2. If the truck is equipped, install the hydraulic
connections for steering and dumping between
the towing and towed vehicles. Check the
towed vehicle braking system.
3. Empty all material from dump body of truck that 2. Allow the engine to cool gradually at low idle for
is to be towed. three to five minutes.
4. Determine that the towing vehicle has adequate 3. With the truck stopped and the engine cool, turn
capacity to both move and stop the towed truck the key switch counterclockwise to OFF for nor-
in all conditions. mal shutdown of the engine. If the engine does
5. Inspect the tow bar. The tow bar capacity must not shutdown with the key switch, use the
be approximately 1.5 times the gross vehicle engine shutdown switch on the center console
weight of the truck being towed. (see Operator Controls section).
6. Block the disabled truck to prevent movement 4. With the key switch OFF and the engine
while attaching the tow bar. stopped, wait at least 90 seconds. Ensure the
pressure is relieved in the steering circuit by
7. Release the disabled truck brakes and remove
turning the steering wheel back and forth sev-
the wheel chocks.
eral times. No front wheel movement will occur
8. Sudden movement may cause tow bar failure. when hydraulic pressure is relieved.
Smooth and gradual truck movement is preferred.
5. Close and lock all windows, remove the key
9. Minimize the tow angle at all times. DO NOT from the key switch, and lock the cab to prevent
exceed 30°. The towed truck must be steered in possible unauthorized truck operation. Dis-
the direction of the tow bar. mount the truck properly.
SAFE PARKING PROCEDURES DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN

The operator must continue the use of safety precau- PROCEDURE
tions when preparing for parking and engine shut- Refer to Section 32, Operator Cab and Controls, for
down. identification of the various switches and indicator
In the event that the equipment is being worked in lights.
consecutive shifts, any questionable truck perfor- 1. Stop the truck. The truck must be away from
mance the operator may have noticed must be other traffic, on a level surface, and away from
checked by maintenance personnel before the truck overhead power lines or other obstructions.
is released to another operator. 2. Reduce the engine speed to low idle.
1. Park the truck on level ground, if possible. If 3. Place the selector switch in NEUTRAL.
parking on a grade, position the truck perpen-
4. Apply the parking brake switch. Ensure the
dicular to the grade.
parking brake applied indicator light in the over-
2. Apply the parking brake and install wheel head display panel is illuminated.
chocks so that the truck cannot roll. Park each
5. Move the top of the engine shutdown switch to
truck a safe distance from one another.
the ON (center) position. Then, firmly press the
3. Haul roads are not safe parking areas. In an switch to the MOMENTARY (upper) position.
emergency, pick the safest spot most visible to Hold this position briefly to activate the five
other machines in the area. If the truck becomes minute idle timer. The switch is spring-loaded
disabled, mark the truck with warning flags in and will return to the ON position when
daylight, or flares at night. released.
ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE

The following procedure must be followed at each
engine shutdown.
1. Stop the truck. Reduce the engine rpm to low
idle. Place the selector switch in NEUTRAL and
apply the parking brake switch. If the engine
shutdown with timer delay is preferred, refer to
the Delayed Engine Shutdown procedure.
6. When the engine shutdown SUDDEN LOSS OF POWER
timer has been activated,
If the engine suddenly stops while the truck is in
the timer delay indicator light
motion, there is enough hydraulic pressure stored in
in the overhead display
the brake and steering accumulators to allow the
panel will illuminate to indi-
operation of the steering and brake functions. How-
cate that the shutdown tim-
ever, this oil supply is limited so it is important to stop
ing sequence has been
the truck as quickly and safely as possible after the
started. The engine will continue to idle for
loss of engine power. If the brake supply pressure
approximately five minutes to allow the engine to
drops to a predetermined level, the low brake pres-
properly cool before turning off.
sure warning light will illuminate and a buzzer will
NOTE: The engine shutdown timer switch does not sound. If the brake pressure continues to decrease,
turn off the 24VDC electric power. the auto-apply feature will activate and the service
7. Turn the key switch to the OFF position to allow brakes will apply automatically to stop the truck.
the engine to turn off when the timing sequence 1. Stop the truck as quickly as possible by using
is complete. When the engine stops after the the foot pedal to apply the service brakes.
five minute idle period, the hydraulic bleed-
down timer will be activated and the 24VDC
electric circuits will turn off.
Dynamic retarding will not be available! DO NOT

use the service brakes for continuous retarding
The engine will only shut off if the key switch is purposes.
in the OFF position. 2. If possible, steer the truck to the side of the road
NOTE: To cancel the five minute idle timer while braking.
sequence, move the timer delay shutdown switch to 3. When stopped, shift to NEUTRAL and apply the
the OFF (lower) position. If the key switch is in the parking brake.
OFF position, the engine will stop. If the key switch is 4. Turn the key switch OFF, and notify mainte-
in the ON position, the engine will continue to run. nance personnel immediately.
8. With the key switch OFF and the engine 5. Install wheel chocks so the truck cannot roll.
stopped, wait at least 90 seconds. Relieve the
steering circuit pressure by turning the steering 6. Mark the truck with warning flags during day-
wheel back and forth several times. No front light hours or use flares at night. Adhere to local
wheel movement will occur when hydraulic regulations.
pressure is relieved.
9. Close and lock all windows, remove the key
from the key switch, and lock the cab to prevent
possible unauthorized truck operation. Dis-
mount the truck properly.
EMERGENCY STEERING SYSTEM Testing
Operation This test can only be performed with an empty truck.
The truck is equipped with an emergency steering 1. Ensure no one is near the front tires during this
system. This system is a backup in the event of loss test. Use a spotter to keep the area around the
of oil supply to the main steering system. The emer- front tires clear of personnel during this test.
gency steering system was designed to meet or 2. Start the engine. Allow the hydraulic system to
exceed SAE J1511 and ISO 5010 standards. reach full pressure and the accumulators to fill
with oil.
If the low steering system pressure indicator light and
alarm are activated, a failure in the hydraulic oil sup- 3. Shut the engine off by using the engine stop
ply to the steering and brake system exists. When the button located on the center console. DO NOT
alarm is activated, typically there is enough hydraulic turn the key switch OFF.
pressure stored in the brake and steering accumula- 4. Turn the steering wheel.
tors to allow brief operation of the steering and brake a. If the front tires respond when the steering
functions. However, this oil supply is limited. There- wheel is turned, the emergency steering sys-
fore, it is important to stop the truck as quickly and tem is functioning properly. Turn the key
safely as possible after the alarm is first activated. switch OFF.
If the oil supply pressure drops to a predetermined b. If the front tires do not steer, turn the key
level, the low brake pressure warning light will also switch OFF and notify maintenance person-
illuminate. If the oil pressure continues to decrease, nel immediately. DO NOT drive the truck
the brake auto-apply feature will activate and the ser- until the problem has been repaired and the
vice brakes will apply automatically to stop the truck. truck can pass this test.
If the truck passes this test, the emergency steering
system is functioning properly.
OM3226 Operation - Section 32
Operator Cab and Controls Page 32-1
OPERATOR CAB AND CONTROLS
FIGURE 32-1. CAB INTERIOR - OPERATOR VIEW
1. Steering Wheel and Controls 6. Heater/Air Conditioner and 11. Radio, AM/FM, Cassette
2. Service Brake Pedal Controls 12. Warning Lights Dimmer Control
3. Dynamic Retarder Pedal 7. Instrument Panel 13. Warning/Status Indicator
4. Throttle/Accelerator 8. Grade/Speed Warning Chart Light Panel
5. Heater/Air Conditioner Vents 9. Radio Speakers 14. Air Cleaner Vacuum Gauges
10. Warning Alarm Buzzer 15. Windshield Wipers
Operation - Section 32 OM3226
Page 32-2 Operator Cab and Controls
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS MULTI-FUNCTION TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
Steering wheel (1, Figure 32-2) will telescope in and
out and adjust through a tilt angle to provide a com-
fortable wheel position for most operators.
HORN BUTTON FIGURE 32-3. MULTI-FUNCTION TURN SIGNAL

Horn button (2, Figure 32-2) is actuated by pushing SWITCH
the button in the center of the steering wheel. Opera- Multi-function turn signal switch (4, Figure 32-2) is used
tion of the horn must be verified before moving the to activate the turn signal lights, the windshield wipers,
truck. Observe all local safety rules regarding the use and to select either high or low beam headlights.
of the horn as a warning signal device before starting
the engine and moving the vehicle. Turn Signal Operation
Move the lever upward to signal a turn to
TILT/TELESCOPE LEVER the right.
The steering column can be telescoped or wheel
tilted with lever (3, Figure 32-2) in front of the turn An indicator in the top, center of the
signal lever. instrument panel will illuminate to indicate the
turn direction selected. Refer to Instrument Panel
Adjust the tilt of the steering wheel by pulling the le- and Indicator Lights in this section.
ver toward the steering wheel and moving the wheel
to the desired angle. Releasing the lever will lock the Move the lever downward to signal a
wheel in the desired location. turn to the left.
Adjust the telescope function by pushing the lever
forward to unlock. After positioning, release the lever NOTE: The turn signal will not automatically stop
to the lock position. after the turn has been completed.
High Beam Headlight Operation

Moving the lever inward toward the rear of
the cab changes the headlights to high
beam. When the high beams are selected,
the indicator in the top, center of the instrument panel
will illuminate. Moving the switch back to the original
position will return the headlights to low beam.
Windshield Wiper Operation

Windshield Wipers Off
Intermittent - Long Delay
Intermittent - Medium Delay
Intermittent - Short Delay
Low Speed
High Speed
Depressing the button at the end of

FIGURE 32-2. STEERING WHEEL AND
the lever will activate the windshield
CONTROLS
washer fluid and turn on the wind-
1. Steering Wheel 3. Tilt/Telescope Lever shield wipers.
2. Horn 4. Multi-Function Turn
Signal
PEDALS When pedal (3) is partially depressed, dynamic

retarding is activated (actuation is modulated).
SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL Pressing the pedal further applies full retarding. Dur-
ing full retarding the service brakes also begin to
Service brake pedal (2, Figure 32-4) is a foot-operated
apply. Completely depressing the pedal causes full
pedal which applies the service brakes.
application of both the dynamic retarding and the ser-
NOTE: In some optional installations, the service vice brakes.
brake pedal may not be present, because it is
incorporated into a single pedal function with retarder THROTTLE PEDAL
pedal (3). Throttle pedal (4, Figure 32-4) is a foot-operated
pedal which allows the operator to control the engine
DYNAMIC RETARDER PEDAL rpm, depending on the pedal depression.
Dynamic retarder pedal (3, Figure 32-4) is a foot-
operated pedal which allows the operator to slow the
truck and maintain a safe productive speed without
the use of the service brakes. For normal truck opera-
tion, only dynamic retarding is used to slow and con-
trol the speed of the truck. Refer to Grade/Speed
Warning chart (8, Figure 32-1) to determine the maxi-
mum safe truck speeds for descending various
grades with a loaded truck. Apply the service brakes
only when dynamic retarding requires additional brak-
ing force to slow the truck speed quickly and to com-
pletely stop the truck.
When dynamic retarding is activated, the engine rpm
will automatically go to an advance rpm retard speed
setting (usually 1250 rpm, see note below.) Dynamic
retarding will be applied automatically if the speed of
the truck reaches the predetermined overspeed FIGURE 32-4. PEDALS
retard setting. Dynamic retarding is available in FOR-
WARD/REVERSE at all truck speeds above 0 kph 1. Cab Floor 3. Dynamic Retarder
(mph) but is available in NEUTRAL only when the 2. Service Brake Pedal Pedal
truck speed is above 5 kph (3 mph). 4. Throttle Pedal
NOTE: The exact engine speed in retarding may vary
(1250 - 1650 rpm) due to the temperature of certain
components, This is controlled by the Statex III
control system.
Optional - Dual Function/Single Pedal

The dynamic retarding/brake pedal is a single foot-
operated pedal which controls both retarding and
service brake functions. Thus, the operator must first
apply, and maintain, full dynamic retarding in order to
apply the service brakes.
CAB CLIMATE CONTROL Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch

Heater/air conditioner selector switch (5, Figure 32-5)
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER VENTS allows the operator to select heat, A/C, or neither. The
The operator has complete control of the air flow in the left position of the switch activates the air conditioning,
cab. Heater/air conditioner vents (5, Figure 32-1) are and the right side of the switch activates the heater. The
flapper-type vents. The vents may be individually middle position is off (no heat or air conditioning).
opened or closed, and may be rotated 360° for opti-
NOTE: The air conditioner will not operate unless the
mum air flow. There are four (three not shown) across
fan control knob is turned on.
the top of the panel, two in front of the operator (one
each in the right and left panel modules), and four Heater/Air Conditioner Vents
below the panel.
Heater/air conditioner vents (6, Figure 32-5) may be
HEATER/AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS rotated 360°. Air flow through the vents is controlled
AND VENTS by manually opening/closing, or turning the louvers.
Heater/air conditioner unit (6, Figure 32-1) contains
heater/air conditioner controls and the heater/air con-
ditioner components, such as the blower motor and
heater coils. Optimum cab air climate can be
selected by using the following controls in various
combinations.
Defroster Vent Control Switch

Defroster vent control switch (1, Figure 32-5) directs
heated air to the windshield for defrosting. The down posi-
tion of the toggle switch is off, and the up position is on.
Heat Control Switch

Heat control switch (2, Figure 32-5) directs heated air
to the cab floor for heating of the cab. The down posi-
tion of the toggle switch is off. The up position of the
toggle switch is on.
Temperature Control Knob

Temperature control knob (3, Figure 32-5) adjusts the
outlet air temperature of the heater/air conditioner.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise (blue arrow) will
select cooler temperatures. Full counterclockwise
position is the coldest air setting.
Rotating the knob clockwise (red arrow) will select
warmer temperatures. Full clockwise position is the
warmest heater setting.
Fan Control Knob

Fan control knob (4, Figure 32-5) controls the 3-speed
heater/air conditioner internal fan unit. Full counter-
clockwise is the off position. Rotating the knob clock-
FIGURE 32-5. A/C AND HEATER CONTROLS
wise selects increasingly higher fan speeds.
1. Defroster Vent 5. Heater/Air
Control Switch Conditioner
2. Heat Control Switch Selector Switch
3. Temperature 6. Heater/Air
Control Knob Conditioner Vents
4. Fan Control Knob
OVERHEAD PANEL CONTROLS AND WARNING ALARM BUZZER

COMPONENTS Warning alarm buzzer (10, Figure 32-1) will sound
when activated by any one of several truck functions.
GRADE/SPEED WARNING CHART Refer to Instrument Panel in this module for a
Grade/Speed Warning chart (Figure 32-6) provides detailed description of the functions and indicators
the recommended maximum truck speeds for that will activate this alarm.
descending various grades with a loaded truck.
CAB RADIO
This panel will normally contain AM/FM radio (11,
Figure 32-1). Refer to Section 70 for a complete
description of the radio and its functions. Individual
customers may use this area for other purposes,
such as a two-way communications radio.
WARNING LIGHTS DIMMER CONTROL

Warning lights dimmer control (12, Figure 32-1) permits
the operator to adjust the brightness of the warning indi-
cator lights. This control may not be on all model trucks.
WARNING/STATUS INDICATOR LIGHT

PANEL
Warning/status indicator light panel (13, Figure 32-1)
contains an array of indicator lights to provide the
operator with important status messages concerning
selected truck functions. Refer to Overhead Status/
Warning Indicator Light Panel in this module for a
detailed description of these indicators.
AIR CLEANER VACUUM GAUGES

Air cleaner vacuum gauges (14,
FIGURE 32-6. GRADE/SPEED WARNING
Figure 32-1) provide a continuous
CHART
reading of maximum air cleaner
The operator must refer to the grade/speed warning restriction reached during opera-
chart before descending any grade with a loaded tion. The air cleaner(s) must be
truck. Proper use of dynamic retarding will maintain a serviced when the gauge(s) dis-
safe speed. play 6.2 kPa (25 in. H20).
DO NOT exceed the recommended maximum speed

when descending a grade with a loaded truck. NOTE: After service, push the reset button on the
This decal may change with optional truck equipment face of the gauge to allow the gauge to return to zero.
such as: wheel motor drive train ratios, retarder grids,
tire sizes, etc. WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Windshield wipers (15, Figure 32-1) are powered by an
RADIO SPEAKERS electric motor. Refer to Multi-Function Turn Signal
Radio speakers (9, Figure 32-1) for the AM/FM radio are Switch in this module for a location and description of
located at the far left and right of the overhead panel. the windshield wiper and washer controls.
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Center Console
2. F-N-R Selector Switch
3. Hoist Control Lever
4. Ashtray
5. Cigarette Lighter
6. LH Window Control Switch
7. RH Window Control Switch
8. Engine Shutdown Switch
9. Override Switch
10. Blank - Not used on this truck
11. RSC ON/OFF Switch
12. Retarder Speed Control (RSC)
Dial
13. Statex III Download Port
14. Engine Diagnostic Port (CENSE)
15. Modular Mining Port (Optional)
16. Passenger Seat (mounted on top
of the right-hand portion of the
console)
17. Engine Diagnostic Connectors
(Optional Quantum/Centry)
18. Engine Diagnostics Connector
(Optional)
19. Data Storage Button
FIGURE 32-7. CENTER CONSOLE
TRUCK CONTROLS
F-N-R Selector Switch
F-N-R selector switch (2, Figure 32-7) is mounted on a
console to the right of the operator's seat. It is a three-
position switch that controls the forward-neutral-
reverse motion of the truck. When the selector switch
handle is in the center N position, it is in NEUTRAL.
The handle must be in NEUTRAL to start the engine.
The operator can select forward drive by

moving the handle forward.
Reverse drive can be selected by moving

the handle rearward.
The truck must be stopped before the selector han-

dle is moved to a forward or reverse drive position.
Hoist Control Lever Override Switch
Hoist control lever (3, Figure 32-7) is a four-position, Override switch
hand-operated lever located between the operator (9, Figure 32-7)
seat and the center console. is spring-loaded
to the OFF posi-
Refer to Safety, Section 20, When Dumping, and
tion. When
Section 30, Dumping, for complete details concern-
pushed inward
ing this control.
and held, this switch has several uses.
CONSOLE SWITCHES AND CONTROLS 1. The override switch permits the operator to
move the truck forward when the selector
Ashtray switch is in FORWARD, the dump body is
Ashtray (4, Figure 32-7) is used for extinguishing and raised, and the brakes are released.
depositing smoking materials. DO NOT use for flam-
mable materials, such as paper.
Ensure that all fire ash is extinguished!
Cigarette Lighter Only use the override switch in emergency situa-

Cigarette lighter (5, Figure 32-7) may be used for tions.
lighting cigars/cigarettes. 2. If the operator stops the truck on an uphill
incline, the override switch can be used to set
Use caution with smoking materials! up the forward propulsion while the brakes are
This socket may also be used for a 12VDC power applied. As soon as the forward propulsion is
supply. felt, release the brakes. As the truck begins to
move forward, release the override switch.
Left-Hand Window Control Switch 3. The override switch deactivates the retard
Left-hand window control switch (6, Figure 32-7) is pedal function when the speed of the truck is
spring-loaded to the OFF position. Pushing the front below 5 kph (3 mph).
of the switch raises the left side cab window. Pushing 4. The override switch is also used to reset an elec-
the rear of the switch lowers the window. tric system fault when indicated by the red warn-
ing light. Refer to Overhead Warning/Status
Right-Hand Window Control Switch Indicator Light Panel in this section.
Right-hand window control switch (7, Figure 32-7) is
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Switch
spring-loaded to the OFF position. Pushing the front
of the switch raises the right side cab window. Push- Retard speed control
ing the rear of the switch lowers the window. switch (11, Figure 32-
7) turns the system off
Engine Shutdown Switch or on. Push the knob
Engine shutdown switch (8, Figure 32-7) is in to turn the system
used to turn the engine off. Pull the switch off, and pull the knob
up to stop the engine. Push the switch out to turn the system on.
down to enable the engine to start. . IN OFF
SWITCH UP SWITCH DOWN OUT ON

ENGINE OFF ENGINE ON
Use this switch to shut the engine off if the key switch
fails to operate, or to stop the engine without turning
off the 24VDC electrical circuits.
A ground level engine shutdown switch is also
located at the right, front corner of the truck.
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Dial Statex III Download Port

RSC dial (12, Figure 32-7) allows the operator to vary Statex III download port (13, Figure 32-7) is used by
the downhill truck speed that the retard speed control qualified personnel to access the STATEX III electric
system will maintain when descending a grade. propulsion diagnostic information and data.
When the dial is rotated counterclockwise Engine Diagnostic Port (CENSE)
toward the turtle symbol, the truck will
descend a grade at lower speeds. Engine diagnostic port (14, Figure 32-7) is used by
qualified personnel to access the engine diagnostic
When the dial is rotated clockwise toward information for the CENSE system. Refer to the
the rabbit symbol, the truck speed will engine manufacturer’s service publications for trou-
increase. bleshooting information.
The throttle pedal position will override the RSC set- Modular Mining Port
ting. If the operator depresses the throttle pedal to
increase the truck speed, dynamic retarding will not Modular mining port (15, Figure 32-7) is used if the
activate unless the truck overspeed setting is optional modular mining system is installed on the
reached, or the retard pedal is used. When the throt- truck.
tle pedal is released, dynamic retarding will activate
at the RSC preset speed. The RSC control will main- Passenger Seat
tain the truck speed at the preset limit. Passenger seat (16, Figure 32-7) is mounted on top
To adjust the RSC control, pull switch (11) to the ON of the right-hand portion of the center console.
position. Start with dial (12) rotated toward the fastest The area beneath the passenger seat provides a
speed while driving the truck at the desired maximum cabinet for various 24VDC electrical components.
speed. Relax the throttle pedal to let the truck coast, Consult the service manual for service involving any
and turn the RSC dial slowly counterclockwise until of these components.
dynamic retarding is activated. Dynamic retarding will
now be activated automatically anytime the set Engine Diagnostic Connectors
speed is reached, the RSC switch is ON, and the
throttle pedal is released. Engine diagnostic connectors (17, Figure 32-7) are
used by qualified personnel to access the engine
With the RSC switch in the ON position and the dial Centry™ fuel control system diagnostic information.
adjusted, the system will function as follows: As the The Centry system is optional.
truck speed increases to the set speed and the throt-
tle pedal released, dynamic retarding will apply. As Engine Diagnostics Connector
the truck speed tries to increase, the amount of
Engine diagnostics connector (18, Figure 32-7) is
retarding effort will automatically adjust to keep the
used by qualified personnel to access engine diag-
selected speed. When the truck speed decreases, the
nostic information. This function is optional.
retarding effort is reduced to maintain the selected
speed. If the truck speed continues to decrease to Data Storage Button
approximately 5 kph (3 mph) below the set speed,
dynamic retarding will turn off automatically. If the Data storage button (19, Figure 32-7) is used to
truck speed must be reduced further, the operator can record a snapshot of the Statex III drive system and
turn the dial to a new setting or depress the retard VHMS.
pedal.
If the operator depresses the retard pedal, and the
retard effort called for is greater than that from the
automatic system, the demand from the pedal will
override the RSC.
PAYLOAD METER
Payload meter (1, Figure 32-9) and payload meter
download connector (2) are used to provide manage-
ment with operational data, such as tonnage hauled
and cycle times.
Refer to Section 60, Payload Meter III, for a complete
description of the payload meter and its functions.
Payload Meter Download Connector

Payload meter download connector (2, Figure 32-9)
is used with a special cable to allow payload meter
(1) to communicate with a portable computer.
FIGURE 32-9. PAYLOAD METER
1. Payload Meter 2. Payload Meter

Download
Connector
OPERATOR SEAT
The operator's seat provides a fully adjustable cush-
ioned ride for the driver's comfort.
ADJUSTMENT
The following adjustments must be made while sitting
in the seat.
1. Headrest: Move up, down, fore, or aft by mov-
ing headrest (1, Figure 32-10) to the desired
position.
2. Armrests: Rotate the adjusting knob until the
armrest is in the desired position. The knobs
are located at the front of the armrests.
3. Backrest: Lift backrest adjustment (3) to
release, and select the backrest angle. Release
the control handle to set.
4. Seat Belt: The operator must have seat belt (4)
buckled in place and properly adjusted when-
ever the vehicle is in motion.
5. Seat Slope: Lift seat slope adjustment (5) and
hold to adjust the slope of the seat. Release the
lever to lock the adjustment.
6. & 7 Air Pillow Lumbar Support: Each upper/
lower air pillow lumbar support (6 or 7) controls
an air pillow. Switch (7) controls the lower air pil-
low, and switch (6) controls the upper air pillow.
To inflate, press on top of the rocker switch and
hold for the desired support, then release. To
deflate, press on the bottom of the rocker switch
and hold for the desired support, then release. FIGURE 32-10. OPERATOR SEAT
Adjust each pillow for the desired support. ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS
8. Seat Suspension: Move suspension adjust- 1. Headrest
ment (8) up to increase ride stiffness and down 2. Armrest Adjustment
to decrease ride stiffness. 3. Backrest Adjustment
9. Horizontal Adjustment: Lift horizontal adjust- 4. Seat Belt
ment (9) and hold. Bend knees to move the seat 5. Seat Slope Adjustment
to a comfortable position. Release the control 6. Upper Air Pillow Lumbar Support
lever to the lock adjustment 7. Lower Air Pillow Lumbar Support
8. Suspension Adjustment
12. Seat Height: Lift seat height adjustment (12)
9. Horizontal Adjustment
and hold to adjust the height of the seat.
10. Mounting Cap Screws and Hardware
Release the lever to lock the adjustment.
11. Seat Belt Tether Cap Screw
12. Seat Height Adjustment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
GENERAL INFORMATION
The operator must understand the function and oper-
ation of each instrument and control (Figure 32-11).
Control functions are identified with international
symbols that the operator must learn to recognize
immediately. This knowledge is essential for proper
and safe operation.
Items that are marked as optional do not apply to
every truck.
CONTROL SYMBOLS
The following symbols are general indicators and may appear in multiple locations and combinations on the instru-
ment panel.
This symbol may be used alone This symbol, when it appears on

or with another symbol. This an indicator or control, identifies
symbol identifies the OFF posi- that this indicator or control is not
tion of a switch or control. used.
This symbol may be used alone This symbol identifies a rotary

or with another symbol. This sym- control or switch. Rotate the knob
bol identifies the ON position of a clockwise or counterclockwise for
switch or control. functions.
This symbol identifies the pushed This symbol identifies a switch

in position of a push-pull switch or used to test or check a function.
control. Press the switch on the side near
the symbol to perform the test.
This symbol identifies the pulled

out position of a push-pull switch
or control.
CONTROL SWITCHES AND GAUGES
FIGURE 32-11. PANEL, GAUGES, INDICATORS, AND CONTROLS
1. Key Switch 16. High Beam Headlight Indicator Light

2. Timer Delayed Engine Shutdown Switch 17. Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
3. Fog Light Switch (Optional) 18. Digital Speedometer/Payload Meter Display
4. Ladder Light Switch 19. Voltmeter Gauge
5. Backup Light Switch 20. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
6. Panel Illumination Lights 21. Engine Water Temperature Gauge
7. Vent(s) - Cab Air Conditioner/Heater 22. Fuel Gauge
8. Engine Cold Weather Starting Aid Switch (Optional) 23. Gauge - Not Used In This Application
9. Rotating Beacon Light Switch (Optional) 24. Engine Hourmeter
10. Heated Mirror Switch (Optional) 25. Gauge - Not Used In This Application
11. Not Used 26. Switch - Not Used In This Application
12. Wheel Brake Lock Switch 27. Headlight Switch
13. Parking Brake Switch 28. Panel Illumination Lights Dimmer Rheostat
14. Digital Tachometer 29. Payload Meter Switch
15. Right Turn Signal Indicator Light
Key Switch
Key switch (1, Figure 32-11) is a three-position (OFF,
RUN, START) switch. When the switch is rotated one
position clockwise, it is in the RUN position and all
electrical circuits (except start) are activated.
With the selector switch in neutral, rotate the key
switch fully clockwise to the START position, and hold
this position until the engine starts. The START posi-
tion is spring-loaded to return to RUN when the key is
released. With the truck stopped, turn the key switch
counterclockwise to OFF for normal engine shutdown.
Use the engine shutdown switch on the center console
if the engine does not shut off with the key switch.
NOTE: A ground level shutdown switch is located on
the lower, front left side of the truck.
Engine Shutdown Switch With Timer Delay Engine Cold Weather Starting
Aid Switch
Engine shutdown switch with timer delay (2, Figure
32-11) is a three-position, rocker-type switch (OFF, Optional engine cold weather
ON, MOMENTARY). Refer to Timer Delayed Engine starting aid switch (8, Figure
Shutdown Switch procedure, Section 30, for a com- 32-11) is spring-loaded to the
plete detailed operation of this switch. OFF position. Use only when
the ambient temperature is
Fog Light Switch below 10°C (50°F). When the switch is held in the
Fog light switch (3, Figure 32-11) ON position, ether is injected into the engine intake
is used by pressing the top of the manifold to aid the engine starting in cold weather.
rocker switch to turn the lights For additional information, refer to Section 30,
on. Pressing the bottom of the Engine Start-Up.
switch turns the lights off. The fog
Rotating Beacon Light Switch
lights are optional.
Press rotating beacon light
Ladder Light Switch switch (9, Figure 32-11) to the
Ladder light switch (4, Figure 32- ON position to activate the rotat-
11) turns the ladder lights on and ing beacon. This is an optional
off. Pressing the top of the rocker feature.
switch turns the lights on. Press-
ing the bottom of the switch turns Heated Mirror Switch
the lights off. Another switch is Press heated mirror switch (10,
mounted at the front left of the Figure 32-11) to activate the heat-
truck near the base of the ladder. ing element in the mirrors. This is
an optional feature.
Backup Light Switch
Backup light switch (5, Figure

32-11) allows the backup lights Wheel Brake Lock Switch
to be turned ON providing Wheel brake lock switch (12, Figure 32-
added visibility and safety when 11) must only be used when the engine
the selector switch (see operator is on. Use this function during dumping
controls) is not in the REV posi- and loading. The brake lock switch actu-
tion. When the switch is pressed toward the ON posi- ates the hydraulic brake system, which locks the rear
tion, manual backup light indicator (B4, overhead wheel service brakes only. When approaching the
panel) will be illuminated. shovel or dump area, stop the truck using the service
brake pedal. When the truck is completely stopped
Panel Illumination Lights
and in the loading position, apply the brake lock by
Panel illumination lights (6, Figure 32-11) provide illu- pressing the rocker switch toward the ON symbol. To
mination for the instrument panel. Brightness is con- release, press the rocker switch toward the OFF
trolled by panel illumination lights dimmer rheostat symbol.
(28).
Cab Air Conditioner/Heater Vents

Cab air conditioner/heater vents (7, Figure 32-11) are
spherically mounted and may be directed by the oper-
ator to provide the most comfortable cabin air flow.
Digital Tachometer
Digital tachometer (14, Figure 32-11) displays the
engine crankshaft speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
The wheel brake lock is used at the shovel and
the dump only to hold the truck in position. Governed rpm:
DO NOT use this switch to stop the truck, unless Low Idle - 750 rpm
the foot-operated treadle valve does not work. High Idle, No load - 1950 rpm maximum
Use of this switch applies the rear service brakes High Idle, Full Load - 1900 rpm
with unmodulated pressure!
DO NOT use the brake lock for parking because
when the engine is stopped, hydraulic pressure Right Turn Signal Indicator
will dissipate, allowing the brakes to release! Light
Right turn signal indicator light
(15, Figure 32-11) illuminates to
indicate the right turn signals are
operating.
High Beam Headlight

Indicator Light
High beam headlight indicator
light (16, Figure 32-11), when lit,
Parking Brake Switch indicates that the truck head-
Parking brake switch (13, Figure 32-11) lights are on high beam.
is spring-applied and hydraulically
released. It is designed to hold the truck
stationary when the engine is shut off Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
and the key switch is turned OFF. The truck must be
Left turn signal indicator light (17,
completely stopped before applying the parking
Figure 32-11) illuminates to indi-
brake, or damage may occur to the parking brake. To
cate the left turn signals are
apply the parking brake, press the rocker switch
operating.
toward the ON symbol. To release the parking brake,
press the rocker switch toward the OFF symbol.
When the key switch is ON and the parking brake
switch is applied, parking brake indicator light (A3, Digital Speedometer/Payload Meter
overhead panel) will be illuminated. Display
NOTE: DO NOT use the parking brake at the shovel Digital speedometer/payload meter
or dump. With the key switch ON and the engine on, display (18, Figure 32-11) indicates
sudden shock caused by loading or dumping could the truck speed in miles per hour (mph). With an
cause the system's motion sensor to release the park optional speedometer, it may indicate the truck
brake. speed in kilometers per hour (kph). The display also
shows the payload meter information. For more infor-
mation, see Payload Meter, Section 60.
Voltmeter Gauge Headlight Switch
Voltmeter gauge (19, Figure 32- Instrument panel lights, clear-
11) indicates the voltage of the ance lights, and headlights are
24V battery system. Normal indi- controlled by headlight switch
cated voltage at high rpm is 27 to (27, Figure 32-11). OFF is
28 volts with the batteries in the selected by pressing the bottom
fully charged condition. When of the switch. Press the top of the
key switch (1) is in the RUN posi- switch until it reaches the first
tion and the engine is stopped, the voltmeter gauge detent to select the panel, clearance, and tail lights
indicates the battery charge condition. only. Press the top of the switch again until it reaches
the second detent to select the headlights, as well as
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge the panel, clearance, and tail lights.
Engine oil pressure gauge (20,
Panel Illumination Lights
Figure 32-11) indicates the pres-
Dimmer Rheostat
sure in the engine lubrication
system in pounds per square Panel illumination lights dimmer
inch (psi). Normal operating rheostat (28, Figure 32-11)
pressure after engine warm up is allows the operator to vary the
138 - 250 kPa (20 to 35 psi) at idle speed. If oil pres- brightness of the instruments
sure is below this range, a problem may exist. Shut and panel lights. Rotating the
the engine off and notify maintenance personnel. knob to the full counterclockwise position turns the
panel lights on to the brightest condition. Rotating the
knob clockwise continually dims the lights until the
Engine Water Temperature OFF position is reached at the full clockwise rotation.
Gauge
Payload Meter Switch
Engine water temperature
gauge (21, Figure 32-11) indi- Payload meter switch (29, Figure
cates the temperature of the 32-11) is a two-way, momentary
coolant in the engine cooling switch. The top position is the
system. The temperature range select position which is used to
after engine warm-up in normal conditions is 74° - step through the different dis-
91°C (165° - 195°F). Temperatures outside of this plays. The lower position is the
range may indicate a problem. set position which is used to set
the operator ID or clear the load
Fuel Gauge and total ton counters. Refer to Payload Meter in this
Fuel gauge (22, Figure 32-11) module for a complete description of the payload
indicates how much diesel fuel is meter system and its functions.
in the fuel tank.
Fuel tank capacity is 3217 liters
(850 gallons.)
Engine Hourmeter
Engine hourmeter (24, Figure
32-11) displays the total number
of hours the engine has been in
operation.
OVERHEAD STATUS/WARNING
INDICATOR LIGHT PANEL
FIGURE 32-12. STATUS/INDICATOR LIGHTS
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR SYMBOLS

Row/ Indicator Indicator Color Row/ Indicator Indicator Color
Column Description Wire Index Column Description Wire Index
A1 High Hydraulic Oil Red - 12F/34TL A4 Blank - For Future Use Yellow - 12M/SP2
Temperature
B4 Backup Indicator Yellow - 12M/47L
B1 Low Steering Pressure Red - 12F/33A
C4 Engine Shutdown Timer Yellow - 12M/23L1
C1 Low Accumulator Red - 12F/33K Switch - Five Minute Idle
Precharge Pressure
D4 Retard Speed Control Yellow - 12M/31R
D1 Electric System Fault Red - 12F/79V
Warning E4 Not Used Yellow - 12M/419
E1 Low Brake Pressure Red - 12F/33L A5 Service Engine Indicator Blue - 12M/528A
(AEM)
A2 Low Hydraulic Tank Level Red - 12F/34LL
B5 High Wheel Motor Red - 12F/722L
B2 Low Automatic Yellow -12FD8/ Temperature Indicator
Lubrication System 68LLP
Pressure C5 Blower Fault Warning Red - 12F/32B
C2 Circuit Breaker Tripped Yellow - 12F/31CB D5 Blank - For Future Use Yellow - 12F/SP4
D2 Hydraulic Oil Filter Yellow - 12F/39 E5 Blank - For Future Use Yellow - 12F/SP5
E2 Low Fuel Indicator Yellow - 12F/38 A6 Blank - For Future Use Yellow - 12M/SP6
A3 Parking Brake Indicator Yellow - 12M/52A B6 Blank - For Future Use Red - 12M/SP7
B3 Service Brake Indicator Yellow - 12M/44L C6 Blank - For Future Use Yellow - 12M/SP8
C3 Body Up Indicator Yellow - 12M/63L D6 Service Engine (CENSE) Yellow - 528/12M
D3 Dynamic Retarding Yellow - 12M/44DL E6 Blank - For Future Use Red - 12M/SP9
Indicator 7. HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH - Wires 11L/45L/45R
E3 Stop Engine Warning Red - 12M/509MA 8. LAMP CHECK SWITCH (Momentary) -
Wire 712/52B/33H/710
INDICATOR LIGHT FUNCTIONS

Amber indicator lights alert the operator the indicated
truck function requires some precaution when
lighted.
If the low steering warning light continues to illu-
Red indicator lights alert the operator the indicated
minate and the alarm continues to sound, low
truck function requires immediate action. Safely stop
steering pressure is indicated. The remaining
the truck and shut the engine off.
pressure in the accumulators allows the operator
to control the truck to a stop. DO NOT attempt
further operation until the malfunction is located
and corrected.
To prevent possible death or severe injury, DO
NOT operate the truck with a red warning light Low Accumulator Precharge Pressure Warning
illuminated. Low accumulator precharge
Refer to Figure 32-12 and the descriptions below for pressure warning light (C1), if illu-
explanations of the symbols. Location of the symbols minated, indicates low nitrogen
is described by rows (A-E) and columns (1-6). precharge for the steering accu-
mulator(s). To check for proper
High Hydraulic Oil accumulator nitrogen precharge,
Temperature the engine must be stopped and
the hydraulic system completely
High hydraulic oil temperature
depressurized. Then turn the key switch to the RUN
(A1) warning light indicates high
position. The warning light will not illuminate if the
oil temperature in the hydraulic
system is properly charged. The warning light will
tank. Continued operation could
flash if the nitrogen precharge within the accumula-
damage the components in the
tor(s) is below 7585 ± 310 kPa (1100 ± 45 psi.)
hydraulic system. Notify mainte-
nance personnel immediately. The light turns on
when hydraulic oil reaches 107°C (225°F).
Low Steering Pressure

When the key switch is turned If the low accumulator precharge warning light
ON, low steering pressure warn- flashes, notify maintenance personnel. To pre-
ing light (B1) will illuminate until vent possible death or severe injury, DO NOT
the steering system hydraulic attempt further operation until the accumulators
pressure reaches 14.7 kPa (2100 have been recharged with nitrogen to 9653 kPa
psi). The warning horn will also (1400 psi.) Sufficient energy for emergency steer-
turn on, and both will remain on ing may not be available if the system is not
until the accumulator has been properly charged.
charged.
During truck operation, the low steering pressure
warning light and warning horn will sound if the steer-
ing system hydraulic pressure drops below 14.7 kPa
(2100 psi.)
• If the light illuminates momentarily (flickers) while
turning the steering wheel at low truck speed and
low engine rpm, this may be considered normal,
and the truck operation may continue.
• If the indicator light illuminates at higher truck
speed and high engine rpm, stop the truck and
notify maintenance.
Electric System Fault Warning Circuit Breaker Tripped

Electric system fault warning light Circuit breaker tripped light (C2)
(D1) will flash on and off when a will illuminate if any of the circuit
malfunction occurs in the electri- breakers in the relay circuit con-
cal system. The warning horn will trol boards are tripped. The relay
also sound intermittently. When circuit boards are located in the
the light comes ON, the propul- electrical control cabinet.
sion will be dropped automatically.
NOTE: Additional circuit breakers are located in the
Reset by pushing the override but-
operator cab behind the center console. However,
ton. If the fault repeats again, stop the truck and report
tripping of these circuit breakers will not activate this
the problem to maintenance personnel.
light.
NOTE: STATEX III records the number of faults/
events. When a predetermined number of faults/ Hydraulic Oil Filter
events are recorded within a given time frame, the Hydraulic oil filter light (D2) indi-
operator will not be able to reset the fault/event by cates a restriction in the high
using the override switch. If this occurs, notify main- pressure filter assembly for either
tenance personnel immediately. the steering or hoist circuit. This
light will illuminate before the fil-
Low Brake Pressure
ters start to bypass. Notify main-
Indicator
tenance personnel at the earliest opportunity after
Red low brake pressure indica- the light illuminates.
tor light (E1) indicates a mal-
NOTE: The filter monitor warning light may also
function within the hydraulic
illuminate after the engine is initially started if the oil
brake circuit. If this light comes
is cold. If the light turns off after the oil has warmed,
on and the buzzer sounds, shut
filter maintenance is not required.
off the truck and notify maintenance personnel.
NOTE: Adequate hydraulic fluid is stored to allow the Low Fuel Indicator
operator to safely stop the truck. Amber low fuel indicator light
(E2) will illuminate when the fuel
Low Hydraulic Tank Level
remaining in the tank is below
Low hydraulic tank level light 95 liters (25 gallons). A warning
(A2) indicates the oil level in the buzzer will also sound.
hydraulic tank is below the rec-
ommended level. Damage to the Parking Brake Indicator
hydraulic pumps may occur if Amber parking brake indicator
operation continues. Shut the light (A3) will illuminate when the
truck off and notify maintenance personnel immedi- parking brake is applied. DO
ately. NOT attempt to drive the truck
with the parking brake applied.
Low Automatic Lubrication
System Pressure
Amber low automatic lubrica- Service Brake Indicator
tion system pressure light (B2)
will illuminate if the automatic Amber service brake indicator
lubrication system fails to reach light (B3) will illuminate when the
2,000 psi (15168 kPa) at the service brake pedal is applied, or
junction block located on the rear axle housing within when the wheel brake lock or
one minute after the lube timer indicates a cycle of emergency brake is applied. DO
grease. To turn the light off, turn the key switch off, NOT attempt to drive the truck
then back on again. Notify maintenance personnel at with the service brakes applied.
the earliest opportunity after the light comes on.
Body Up Indicator Backup Indicator
Amber body up indicator light Amber backup indicator light
(C3), when illuminated, indicates (B4) will illuminate when backup
the body is not completely at rest light switch (5, Figure 32-11) is
on the frame. DO NOT not drive turned on.
the truck until the body is down
and the light is off.
Engine Shutdown Timer
Dynamic Retarding Indicator
Switch- Five Minute Idle
Amber dynamic retarding indica-
When engine shutdown timer
tor light (D3) illuminates when
switch (2, Figure 32-11) has been
the retarder pedal is pressed, the
activated, indicator light (C4) will
RSC (Retarder Speed Control) is
illuminate to indicate the shut-
activated, or the automatic over-
down timing sequence has
speed retarding circuit is ener-
started.
gized.
Retard Speed Control
Stop Engine Warning
Amber retard speed control light
Red stop engine warning light
(D4) is illuminated when the RSC
(E3) will illuminate if a serious
switch is pulled out to the ON
engine malfunction is detected in
position.
the electronic engine control
system. Electric propulsion to
the wheel motors will be discon-
tinued, and the maximum engine speed will be Service Engine
reduced to 1250 rpm. Dynamic retarding will still be Indicator (AEM)
available if needed to slow or stop the truck. Amber service engine indicator
light (A5) will illuminate when
the Advanced Engine Monitor
(AEM) system detects a fault. A
warning buzzer will also sound.
Stop the truck as quickly as possible in a safe High Wheel Motor

area and apply the parking brake. Temperature Indicator
Shut the engine off immediately. Additional
When high wheel motor temper-
engine damage is likely to occur if the engine
ature indicator light (B5) is illu-
continues to operate.
minated and the alarm sounds,
high wheel motor temperature is
indicated. Stop the truck, place
the selector switch in NEUTRAL, and raise the
engine rpm to high idle for several minutes to cool the
wheel motors. If the indicator does not turn off, notify
maintenance personnel.
Blower Fault Warning Hazard Warning Light

Switch
Blower fault warning light (C5)
will flash on and off. An alarm will Hazard warning light switch
sound if a malfunction occurs in (7) flashes all the turn signal
the cooling air circuit for the alter- lights. Pressing the bottom
nator and motorized wheels. side of the rocker switch
Stop the truck immediately, and toward the triangle activates
notify maintenance personnel if the warning light is these lights. Pressing the top
illuminated. Damage to electrical components may side of the rocker switch
result without the proper ventilation of the blower. toward the OFF symbol turns these lights off.
Service Engine Indicator Lamp Test Switch/Centry™

(CENSE) Diagnostic Test Switch
When the key switch is turned to This switch may be used for
the RUN position before starting the lamp test, and for Cen-
the engine, amber service try™ diagnostic tests (8) on
engine indicator light (D6) will engines equipped with Cen-
illuminate for about two seconds. try™ fuel control.
The light will then turn off if no faults are detected in
The lamp test switch is pro-
the system. If this indicator remains on, or flashes
vided to allow the operator to test the indicator lamps
when equipped with the Centry™ fuel control sys-
prior to starting the engine. To test the lamps and the
tem, alert maintenance personnel as soon as possi-
warning horn, turn key switch (1, Figure 32-11) to the
ble.
RUN position, and press the bottom side of the
Komatsu Engines w/Centry™ Fuel Control rocker switch for the CHECK position. All lamps will
illuminate, except those which are for optional equip-
This indicator monitors the Centry™ fuel system. ment that is not installed. The warning horn will also
During engine operation, if a fault is detected in the sound. Any lamps that do not illuminate indicate a
system, the light will turn on and stay on indicating a problem in that circuit. Notify maintenance before
warning fault. For more severe faults that can affect driving the truck. Releasing the spring-loaded switch
engine operation, the light will flash indicating that will allow the switch to return to the OFF position.
immediate attention is required.
For diagnostic tests of a Komatsu engine equipped
• Warning faults (light on) are ones that require with the Centry™ fuel control, refer to Centry™ Diag-
attention in the near future, but in most nostics at the end of this section.
conditions, will not greatly affect governing
performance.
• Severe faults (light flashing) are ones that require
immediate attention, because Centry™ governor
performance could be significantly affected,
resulting in a backup mode of operation.
Active fault conditions must be corrected as soon as
possible.
Refer to the lamp test/diagnostic test switch for addi-
tional description of this light's function.
CENTRY™ FUEL SYSTEM Lamp test/diagnostic test switch (8, Figure 32-12)
DIAGNOSTICS may be used to activate the Centry™ fuel system
diagnostic codes. When the Centry™ fuel system
GENERAL OPERATION detects a fault and service engine indicator light (D6,
Figure 32-12) illuminates, this switch will permit iden-
Service engine indicator light (D6, Figure 32-12) tification of the fault(s) detected.
monitors the Centry™ fuel system.
Centry™ fault codes consist of three numerical digits.
When the key switch is turned on, this light will illumi- Each digit is indicated with up to five light flashes
nate for about two seconds and then turn off, if no (service engine indicator light) per each digit. There
faults are detected in the system. If the light stays on is a short pause between each digit of the fault code.
or flashes, then active faults have been detected by Once all three digits are flashed, there is a longer
the system. DO NOT start the engine if the indicator pause, followed by a repeat of the same fault code
remains lit. sequence.
1. To determine an active Centry™ fault, turn the
key switch to the OFF position. Ensure the
engine completely stops, if it was on.
2. Turn the key switch to the ON position (engine
not on), and press the lamp test switch to the
bottom (√) position for one to two seconds, then
release. The switch is spring-loaded and will
return to the OFF position.
NOTE: Since this is the lamp test switch, all red
warning lights and amber indicator lights will light
except those that are blank. The warning horn will
also sound.
DETERMINING FAULT CODES

During engine operation, if a fault is detected in the
system, the light will turn on and stay on indicating a
warning fault. For more severe faults that can affect
engine operation, the light will flash indicating that
immediate attention is required..
Warning faults (light on) are ones that require atten-

tion in the near future, but in most conditions, will not
greatly affect governing performance.
Severe faults (light flashing) are ones that require
immediate attention, because Centry™ governor
performance could be significantly affected, resulting
in a backup mode of operation.
Active fault conditions must be corrected as soon as
possible.
3. If there is an active fault after releasing the EXITING THE DIAGNOSTICS MODE
switch, there will be a short pause, followed by
Starting the engine or turning the key switch to the OFF
the first fault code.
position will exit the diagnostics fault flash mode.
If active fault codes have been identified, refer to the

Cummins Centry™ System Troubleshooting and Repair
4. Pressing the lamp test switch to the bottom (√) Manual, Bulletin No. 3666070, or contact an authorized
again will advance to the next fault code (if repair location.
more than one code is present). Once all the
active fault codes have been displayed, the fault
code display sequence will be repeated, starting
from the first fault code.
VEHICLE HEALTH MONITORING When the key switch is turned OFF, the VHMS con-
SYSTEM (VHMS) troller will remain on while it finishes processing inter-
nal data and saves the recent data into permanent
BASIC PRECAUTIONS memory. When the data has been safely stored, the
two digit LED display will turn off. This process could
• DO NOT disassemble, repair, or modify the take up to three minutes to complete.
VHMS system. This may cause failure or fire.
• DO NOT touch any system components when
operating the machine.
• DO NOT pull on wiring harnesses, connectors, or
sensors. This may cause short circuits or
disconnections that lead to failure or fire. If the 24V power is disconnected from the VHMS
controller before it has completed its shut down
• DO NOT get water, dirt, or oil on the system procedure, the VHMS controller will lose all data
controllers.
gathered since the key switch was last turned on.
• If there are any problems with the VHMS system, DO NOT disconnect battery power until the
please consult the servicing Komatsu distributor. VHMS controller has completed the shutdown
procedure and has turned the LED digits off.
OPERATION
The Orbcomm controller transmits data through
The VHMS system automatically monitors the condi- antenna (1, Figure 32-13) mounted on top of the cab.
tion of the truck and requires no action from the truck The antenna coaxial cable is routed through tube (2)
operator and its systems. to protect it from damage. If the antenna or coaxial
This system uses VHMS controller (2, Figure 32-13) cable is damaged, replace the parts.
to gather data about the operation of the truck from
the sensors and other controllers installed on the
truck. The data stored in the VHMS controller is col-
lected by personal computer or transmitted directly
by communications satellite (utilizing the Orbcomm
controller). This data is then compiled by the
Komatsu computer server. Based on this information,
the servicing Komatsu distributor will suggest
improvements or provide information aimed at reduc-
ing machine repair costs and downtime.
When data store button (2, Figure 32-14), located on
the back of the center console, is pressed, it will store
a snapshot of the Statex III drive system. It will also
trigger the VHMS system to store a snapshot of the
truck operating system. Snapshot light (4, Figure 32-
13) is a blue light that illuminates while the VHMS
system is recording the snapshot.
The VHMS system is turned on by the truck key
switch. Immediately after receiving 24V power from
the key switch, the VHMS controller begins the
power-up initialization sequence. This sequence
takes about three seconds, during which time red
LED digits (3) near the top of the controller will dis- FIGURE 32-13. VHMS COMPONENT LOCATION
play a circular sequence of flashing LED segments.
1. Orbcomm Controller 3. LED Digits
During normal truck operation, the red LED digits on 2. VHMS Controller 4. Snapshot Light
the VHMS controller will count from 1-99 continuously. 5. VHMS Download Port
INTERFACE MODULE
Interface module (3, Figure 32-17) is located inside
control cabinet (1, Figure 32-16). The interface mod-
ule is attached inside door (2).
FIGURE 32-14. CENTER CONSOLE

1. Center Console 2. Data Storage Button FIGURE 32-16. CONTROL CABINET
(Statex III and
VHMS) 1. Control Cabinet 2. Door
The Interface Module (IM) receives data from the sen-

sors installed on the truck and sends this information
to the VHMS controller. There is a small green LED
light (2, Figure 32-17) on the face of the controller.
With the key switch ON, the light will blink. If the light
is continuously illuminated, there is a problem in the
controller.
When a new interface module controller is installed
on the truck, new software must be installed inside
the controller. IM-diag connector (4) is used to con-
nect the interface module to a personal computer for
installing software.
FIGURE 32-15. ORBCOMM ANTENNA

1. Orbcomm Antenna 2. Tube
FIGURE 32-17. INTERFACE MODULE LOCATION

1. Control Cabinet 3. Interface Module
2. Green LED Light (IM)
4. IM-Diag Connector
NOTE: IM-diag connector (4) may also be located at
the center, right-hand side of the door.
NOTES
OM4052 Maintenance - Section 40
Lubrication and Service Page 40-1
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE

GENERAL INFORMATION Komatsu trucks are equipped with an automatic lubri-
cation system. The system is designed to automatically
The recommended preventive maintenance will con-
deliver the proper amount of lubricant to a specified
tribute to the long life and dependability of the truck and
lubrication point such as a steering cylinder pin or body
its components. The use of proper lubricants and the
pivot pin. This system uses lubrication injectors, one for
performance of checks and adjustments at recom-
each lubrication point, which can be adjusted to supply
mended intervals is most important.
the precise amount of lubricant to each specific lubrica-
Lubrication requirements are referenced to the lube tion point. A timer is also designed into the system to
key found in the Lubrication chart in this section. For activate the lube pump on a preset interval. This time
detailed service requirements for specific components, interval is adjustable, depending on the requirements
refer to the shop manual. for lubrication. For additional information on the sys-
tem, refer to Automatic Lubrication System in this man-
Refer to the manufacturer's service manual when ser-
ual.
vicing any components of the General Electric system.
Refer to the engine manufacturer's service manual HYDRAULIC TANK SERVICE
when servicing the engine or any of its components.
There are two sight gauges on the side of the hydraulic
tank. With the engine stopped, key switch off, hydraulic
system not pressurized, and body down, the oil must
730E SERVICE CAPACITIES be visible in the top sight gauge. If the hydraulic oil is
U.S. not visible in the top sight gauge, follow the Adding Oil
Liters Gallons instructions below.
Crankcase 223 59 Adding Oil
(including lube oil filters)
Cooling System 409 108 Keep the system open to the atmosphere only as long
as absolutely necessary to lessen the chances of sys-
Hydraulic System 731 193 tem contamination.
Wheel Motor Gear Box 40 10.5
Service the tank with clean type C-4 hydraulic oil only.
(each side)
All oil being put into the hydraulic tank must be filtered
Fuel Tank (diesel fuel only) 3217 850 to a cleanliness of 3 microns or less.
1. With the engine stopped, key switch off, hydraulic
system not pressurized, and body down, hydrau-
The service intervals presented here are in hours of
lic oil must be visible in the top sight glass.
operation. These intervals are recommended as a sub-
stitute for an oil analysis program, which may deter- 2. If the hydraulic oil is not visible in the top sight
mine different intervals. However, if the truck is being gauge, remove the tank fill cap and add clean, fil-
operated in extreme conditions, some, or all of the tered C-4 hydraulic oil. Fill with oil until it is visible in
intervals, may need to be shortened and the service the top sight glass.
performed more frequently. 3. Install the fill cap.
4. Start the engine. Raise and lower the dump body
three times.
5. Repeat this procedure until the oil is maintained
in the top sight glass with the engine stopped,
body down, and hydraulic system not pressur-
ized.
Maintenance - Section 40 OM4052
Page 40-2 Lubrication and Service
COOLING SYSTEM Antifreeze Temperature Recommendations
Coolant Level Check

Check the coolant sight gauge. If the coolant cannot be COOLING SYSTEM ANTIFREEZE
seen in the sight gauge, add coolant to the cooling sys- RECOMMENDATIONS
tem before operating the truck. Refer to the following
section for the proper filling procedure. (Ethlyene Glycol Permanent Type Antifreeze)
Percentage of Protection To
Radiator Filling Procedure Antifreeze
10 - 5°C +23°F
20 - 9°C +16°F
25 - 11°C +11°F
The engine coolant must be visible in the sight
gauge before operating the truck. After operating 30 - 16°C +4°F
the truck, the cooling system will be pressurized 35 - 19°C - 3°F
due to the thermal expansion of coolant. DO NOT 40 - 24°C - 12°F
remove the radiator cap while the engine and cool-
ant are hot. Severe burns may result. 45 - 30°C - 23°F
50 - 36°C - 34°F
55 - 44°C - 48°F
1. With the engine and coolant at ambient tempera-
ture, press the pressure relief button to release 60 - 52°C - 62°F
any remaining pressure, and remove the radiator Use only antifreeze that is compatible with the
cap. engine, as specified by the engine manufacturer.
NOTE: If the coolant is added using the Wiggins quick
fill system, the radiator cap must be removed prior to
adding the coolant.
2. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture, as

specified by the engine manufacturer, until the
coolant is visible in the sight gauge.
3. Install the radiator cap.
4. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle for five
minutes. Check the coolant level at the sight
gauge.
5. If the coolant is not visible in the sight gauge,
repeat the procedure. Any excess coolant will be
discharged through a vent hose after the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
LUBRICATION CHART
10 HOUR LUBE AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS
Truck Serial Number______________________ Site Unit Number_______________ Date_______________

Hourmeter_____________ Name of Service Technician___________________________________
TASK COMMENTS CHECKED INITIALS

1. MACHINE - Inspect the entire truck for leaks, worn
parts, and damage. Repair as necessary.
2. TURBOCHARGERS - Check for leaks, vibration, or
unusual noise.
3. ALTERNATOR - Check the alternator, belt condition,
and alignment.
4. RADIATOR - Check the coolant level and fill with the
proper mixture, as shown in the Cooling System Anti-
freeze Recommendation chart in this section. Refer to
the engine service manual for the proper DCA levels.
5. ENGINE - Check the oil level. Refer to the engine
manufacturer's service manual for oil recommenda-
tions.
6. AIR CLEANERS - Check the air cleaner vacuum
gauges in the operator cab. The air cleaner(s) must
be serviced if the maximum restriction reaches: 6.2
kPa (25 in. of H20). See Section C of the Shop man-
ual for servicing the air cleaner elements. Empty the
air cleaner dust caps.
NOTE: After service, push the reset button on the
face of the gauge to allow the gauge to return to zero.
7. WHEELS AND TIRES - FRONT AND REAR
a. Verify the tires are properly inflated.
b. Inspect the tires for abnormal wear or dam-
age.
c. Check for embedded debris in the tires.
After each wheel installation, recheck the tightness of
the wheel nuts after approximately five hours of oper-
ation. Check again at the end of the shift, and then
periodically until all the nuts remain at 610 N·m (450 ft
lbs).
8. BODY-UP SWITCH - Clean the sensing area of the
switch.
9. HOIST LIMIT SWITCH - Clean the sensing area of
the switch.
10. HYDRAULIC TANK - Check the oil level in the tank.
The oil must be visible in the top sight glass. Add oil, if
necessary, but do not overfill.
Refer to Hydraulic Tank Service in this section for
additional information.
Use Lube Key B.
50 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS


1. FAN - After the first 50 hours of operation (new truck
or new fan installation), check the tightness of the fan
mounting cap screws - 122 N·m (90 ft lbs).
2. MOTORIZED WHEELS - Check oil level. Refer to
Motorized Wheel Maintenance Schedule in Section P
of the shop manual for the lubrication specifications
and service intervals.
Complete the 10 hour lube and maintenance checks.



1. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL FILTERS - Change the fil-
ter elements after the initial 100 hours of operation
and again at 250 hours. The normal service interval
for these elements is 500 hours.
2. WHEEL MOTORS - Take oil samples every 100 hours
for the first 1000 hours. After 1000 total hours, oil
samples must be taken every 250 hours.
3. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM - Perform the preventa-
tive maintenance inspection, as outlined in Automatic
Lubrication, Section 42, in this manual.
Complete the 10 and 50 hour lubrication and mainte-

nance checks.


1. ENGINE - Refer to the engine operation and mainte-
nance manual for the complete specifications regard-
ing the engine lube oil specifications.
NOTE: If the engine is equipped with the Centinel™ oil
system, and/or the Eliminator™ filter system, the engine
oil and filter change intervals are extended beyond 250
hours. Refer to the engine service manual for specific oil
and filter change intervals.
a. Change the engine oil. Refer to the engine
service manual for oil specifications.
b. Replace the oil filters.
NOTE: When installing the spin-on filter elements, fol-
low the instructions, as specified by the filter manu-
facturer. The tightening instructions are normally
printed on the outside of the filter. DO NOT use a
wrench or strap to tighten the filter elements.
c. If the truck is equipped with a reserve engine
oil tank, change the reserve tank oil filter.
d. Check the fan belt tension. Refer to the engine
service manual for fan belt adjustment instruc-
tions.
2. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL FILTERS - Change the fil-
ter elements after the initial 250 hours, then each 500
hours of operation thereafter.
3. FUEL FILTER - Change the filters.
4. MOTORIZED WHEEL GEAR CASE - Refer to Motor-
ized Wheel Maintenance Schedule in Section P of the
shop manual. Check the oil level. Use Lube Key C.
5. STEERING LINKAGE - Ensure the steering pin nuts
are tightened to 465 ± 46 N·m (343 ± 34 ft lbs).
6. COOLING SYSTEM DCA WATER FILTERS - Change
the spin-off filters. Check the cooling system for the
proper coolant mixture and add, as required.
7. PUMP DRIVE SHAFT - Add grease to each grease
fitting on the drive shaft. Use Lube Key D.
8. FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS - Check the oil level.
Position the fill plug at the 12 o’clock position. The
floating ball in the sight gauge must be at its highest
position. Add oil as necessary.
9. FUEL TANK - Drain water and sediment.
10. GE PREFILTER BLOWER - Add grease to the grease
fitting. Use Lube Key D.
11. GREASE RESERVOIR - Add grease to the in-frame

grease reservoir. When grease is pumped out of the
overflow tube, the reservoir is full. Use Lube Key D.
12. BATTERIES - Check the electrolyte level and add
water, if necessary.
13. WHEEL MOTORS - Take an oil sample for oil analy-
sis.
14. AC DRIVE BELT - Check the belt for wear or
damage. Verify the belt tension is correctly set.
Ensure the pulleys are aligned with each other within
3 mm (0.13 in.).
15. CAB AIR FILTER - Clean the filter element with mild
soap and water. Rinse completely clean, and air dry.
In extremely dusty conditions, service as frequently
as required. Reinstall the filter. Replace the filters
every 2000 hours of service.
16. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM - Perform 250 hour
checks as outlined in Automatic Lubrication System,
Section 42, in this manual.
Complete the 10, 50, and 100 hour lubrication and

maintenance checks.


1. FINAL DRIVE CASE BREATHERS - Remove the
breather elements from the motorized wheels. Clean
or replace the elements.
2. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL FILTERS - Replace the
filter elements. Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil
tank and add oil, as necessary. Use Lube Key B.
3. HYDRAIR® SUSPENSION - Check for the proper
piston extension (front and rear). Refer to Section H4
in the service manual for more information on proper
suspension extension and maintenance procedures.
4. THROTTLE AND BRAKE PEDAL - Lubricate the trea-
dle roller and hinge pins with lubricating oil. Lift the
boot from the mounting plate and apply a few drops of
oil between the mounting plate and plunger. Use Lube
Key B.
5. HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER - Replace the
breather.
6. ACCUMULATOR PRE-CHARGE - Check the steering
and brake system accumulator pre-charge pressures.
Refer to the shop manual for details.
7. WHEEL MOTORS - Check the armature section for
wear or damage. Refer to Motorized Wheel Mainte-
nance Schedule in Section P of the shop manual.
8. PARKING BRAKE LINING - Check the parking brake
lining by:
a. Apply the parking brake.
b. Use a feeler gauge to measure the gap between
the piston and the surface of the parking brake disc.
c. If the gap is 0.76 mm (0.03 in.) or less, the parking
brake lining must be replaced. To replace the parking
brake lining, follow the Parking Brake Lining Replace-
ment procedure in Section J of the shop manual.
9. FRONT BRAKE DISC - Measure the thickness of the
disc. If 20 to 25% of the disc wear surface is worn
below 28.7 (1.13 in.), the disc must be replaced.
Refer to the shop manual, Parking Brake, Section J,
for additional information.
10. VHMS DATA DOWNLOAD - Using a laptop PC with
the VHMS Technical Analysis Tool box program, per-
form a data download from the VHMS controller.
Send the data to WebCARE using the FTP feature.
Refer to Section D in the applicable shop manual for
more detailed instructions.
Complete the 10, 50, 100, and 250 hour lubrication and
maintenance checks.


1. HYDRAULIC TANK - Drain the hydraulic oil, and
clean the inlet strainer. Refill the tank with new oil,
approximate capacity 507 l (134 gal). Use Lube Key
B.
2. RADIATOR - Clean the cooling system with a quality
cleaning compound and flush with water. Refill the
system with DCA or antifreeze and water solution.
Check the Cooling System Antifreeze Recommenda-
tion chart in this section for the correct mixture.
3. FUEL TANK - Remove the breather and clean it in
solvent. Dry with pressurized air and reinstall.
4. ENGINE - Remove, clean, and dry the crankcase
breather elements.
5. OPERATOR'S SEAT - Apply grease to the slide rails.
Use Lube Key D.
6. AUTOMATIC BRAKE APPLICATION - Ensure the
brakes are automatically applied when the brake
pressure decreases below the specified limit. Refer to
the shop manual, Section J, Brake Checkout Proce-
dure.
7. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM PUMP - Check the
pump housing oil level. Refill to the bottom of the level
plug with SAE 10W-30 motor oil.
8. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM - Perform checks as
outlined in the Preventative Maintenance procedure
of Section 42 in this manual.
Complete the 10, 50, 100, 250, and 500 hour lubrica-
tion and maintenance checks.


1. WHEEL MOTORS - Change oil. Clean sump mag-
netic plugs. Refer to Motorized Wheel Maintenance
Schedule in Section P of the shop manual for addi-
tional information.


1. WHEEL MOTORS - Check for spline and gear wear.
Refer to Motorized Wheel Maintenance Schedule in
Section P of the shop manual.
2. FRONT WHEELS - Drain and refill with oil. Use Lube
Key C. Oil may need to be changed more frequently,
depending on mine conditions and the results of the
oil sample tests.
a. Remove the drain plug and drain the oil from
the front wheel hub. Inspect and reinstall the
drain plug.
b. If necessary, rotate the wheel hub to position
the fill plug at 12 o’clock.
c. Remove the fill plug.
d. Fill wheel hub assembly with SAE 80W-90 oil.
e. When properly filled, the floating ball in the
sight gauge will be at its highest position.
f. Replace the fill plug.


1. AIR CLEANERS - Clean the Donaclone tubes in the
pre-cleaner section of the air filter. Use low pressure
cold water or low pressure air to clean the tubes.
Refer to Section C of the service manual for additional
information.
2. FRONT WHEELS - Check the front wheel bearing
preload, as per Section G in the Shop manual for Dis-
assembly and Assembly procedures.
Complete the 10, 50, 100, 250, 500, 1000, and 2500
hour lubrication and maintenance checks.
10,000 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS


1. WHEEL MOTORS - Clean the area around the
grease ports to prevent dirt or other contaminates
from entering. Remove the six grease port plugs on
each wheel motor. Grease the inboard and outboard
wheel hub bearings with 414 mL (14 oz) of grease per
each grease port.
Complete the 10, 50, 100, 250, 500, 1000, 2500, and
5000 hour lubrication and maintenance checks.
OM4206 06/06 Maintenance - Section 42
Automatic Lubrication System Page 42-1
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM

GENERAL DESCRIPTION During the down stroke, the pump cylinder is
extended into the grease. Through the combination of
The automatic lubrication system is a pressurized shovel action and vacuum generated in the pump cyl-
lubricant delivery system which delivers a controlled inder, the grease is forced into the pump cylinder.
amount of lubricant to designated lubrication points. Simultaneously, grease is discharged through outlet
The system is controlled by an electric timer which (9) of the pump. The volume of grease during intake
signals a solenoid valve to operate a hydraulic motor is twice the amount of grease output during one
powered grease pump. Hydraulic oil for pump opera- cycle. During the upstroke, the inlet check valve
tion is supplied by the truck steering circuit. closes, and one-half of the grease taken in during the
Grease output is proportional to the hydraulic motor previous stroke is transferred through the outlet
input flow. A pump control manifold (4, Figure 42-1), check and discharged to the outlet port.
mounted on top of hydraulic motor (2), controls input
flow and pressure. 24VDC solenoid (5) mounted on
the manifold turns the pump on and off.
NOTE: Newer models are equipped with fixed Over-pressurizing of the system, modifying parts,
hydraulic motor controls. using incompatible chemicals and fluids, or using
The pump is driven by the rotary motion of the worn or damaged parts, may result in equipment
hydraulic motor, which is then converted to recipro- damage and/or serious personal injury.
cating motion through an eccentric crank mechanism. • DO NOT exceed the stated maximum working
The reciprocating action causes the pump cylinder to pressure of the pump, or of the lowest rated
move up and down. The pump is a positive displace- component in the system.
ment, double-acting type as grease output occurs on • DO NOT alter or modify any part of this
both the up and the down stroke. system unless approved by factory
authorization.
• DO NOT attempt to repair or disassemble the
equipment while the system is pressurized.
• Ensure all fluid connections are securely
tightened before using this equipment.
• Read and follow the fluid manufacturer's
recommendations regarding fluid
compatibility, and the use of protective
clothing and equipment.
• Check all equipment regularly and repair, or
replace, worn or damaged parts immediately.
This equipment generates very high grease pres-

sure. Extreme caution must be used when operat-
FIGURE 42-1. PUMP COMPONENTS ing this equipment, as material leaks from loose
1. Orifice Fitting 5. Solenoid Valve or ruptured components can inject fluid through
2. Hydraulic Motor 6. Pressure Gauge the skin and into the body, causing serious bodily
3. Pressure Reducing 7. Pump Assembly injury, including possible need for amputation.
Valve 8. Flow Control Valve Adequate protection is recommended to prevent
4. Pump Control 9. Grease Outlet splashing of material onto the skin or into the
Manifold 10. Grease Pickup Tube eyes.
11. Manual Override
If any fluid appears to penetrate the skin, get
emergency medical care immediately! DO NOT
treat as a simple cut. Tell attending physician
exactly what fluid was injected.
Maintenance - Section 42 06/06 0M4206
Page 42-2 Automatic Lubrication System
Hydraulic inlet pressure must not exceed 20685

kPa (3000 psi). Exceeding the rated pressure may
result in damage to system components and pos-
sible personal injury.
Specifications are as follows:

Maximum hydraulic oil inlet pressure:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20685 kPa (3000 psi)
Hydraulic oil operating pressure:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2240-2415 kPa (325-350 psi)
Hydraulic inlet flow:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up to 28 L/min. (7 GPM)
Pump ratio:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 9:1 @ 2068 to 2415 kPa
(300 to 350 psi) oil pressure = less than 7 L/min.
(2 GPM) flow
FIGURE 42-2. STEERING CYLINDER AND TIE
Operating temperature:
ROD INJECTORS
1. Steering Cylinder/Tie 3. To Steering Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 to +65°C (-20 to +150°F)
Rod Injectors Rod End
2. To Steering Cylinder 4. Supply From Pump Reservoir
Cap End 5. To Tie Rod Reservoir (6) has an approximate capacity of 97 kg
(214 lbs) of grease. When the grease supply is replen-
SYSTEM COMPONENTS ished by filling the system at the service center, the
grease is passed through filter assembly (14) to
Filter Assembly remove contaminants before it flows into the reservoir.
Filter assembly (14, Figure 42-3) filters the grease
Fixed Pressure Reducing Valve
prior to refilling reservoir (6) from the shop supply.
Dirty filter indicator (13) alerts service personnel Pressure reducing valve (12, Figure 42-3), located on
when the filter requires replacement. the manifold, is preset and reduces the hydraulic supply
pressure from the truck steering circuit to a suitable
Hydraulic Motor and Grease Pump operating pressure of 2240 - 2415 kPa (325 - 350 psi)
Hydraulic motor and grease pump (16 & 4, Figure for the hydraulic motor used to drive the lubricant pump.
42-3) is a hydraulically operated grease pump. Inte- The pressure reducing valve has a fixed pressure
grated pump control manifold (4, Figure 42-1) is setting and must not be changed.
incorporated with the motor to control input flow and
pressure. Flow Control Valve
NOTE: The pump crankcase oil level must be Flow control valve (23, Figure 42-3), mounted on the
maintained to the level of oil fill plug (22, Figure 42- manifold, is preset and controls the amount of oil flow
3). If necessary, refill with 10W-30 motor oil. to the hydraulic motor at 2.5 GPM (9.5 L/min).
The flow control valve has a fixed pressure setting
and must not be changed.
FIGURE 42-3. AUTO LUBRICATION SYSTEM (FRONT AND REAR VIEW)

1. Vent Valve 7. Reservoir Vent Tube 13. Dirty Filter Indicator 20. Unloader Valve
2. Vent Valve/Vent Hose 8. Hydraulic Oil Return 14. Filter Assembly (Not Adjustable)
3. Grease Pump Supply 9. Hydraulic Oil Supply 15. Reservoir Fill Hose 21. Pump Cutoff
Hose To Vent Valve 10. Vent Valve Return Hose (To Filter) Pressure Switch
4. Grease Pump 11. Grease Supply To 16. Hydraulic Motor 22. Oil Fill Plug
5. Grease Supply From Injectors 17. Manual Override Button 23. Flow Control Valve
Filter 12. Pressure 18. Pressure Gauge
6. Reservoir Reducing Valve 19. Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve Unloader Valve

Solenoid valve (19), when energized, allows oil to Unloader valve (20) is mounted on a tee fitting with
flow to the hydraulic motor. pump cutoff pressure switch (21). This valve will
relieve grease pressure in the pump if pressure
Vent Valve exceeds 27,600 kPa (4000 psi). This valve has been
With vent valve (1, Figure 42-3) closed, the pump factory adjusted and is not repairable.
continues to operate until maximum grease pressure
Pressure Switch
is achieved. As this occurs, the vent valve opens and
allows the grease pressure to drop to zero, so the Pressure switch (15, Figure 42-4) is a normally open
injectors can recharge for their next output cycle. switch set at 13789 kPa (2000 psi). This switch mon-
itors grease pressure in the injector bank on the rear
24VDC Lubrication Cycle Timer
axle housing. If the proper pressure is not sensed
Lubrication cycle timer (2, Figure 42-11) provides a within 60 seconds and the switch contacts do not
24VDC timed-interval signal to operate solenoid close, a warning light notifies the operator a problem
valve (19, Figure 42-3), causing the grease pump exists in the lubrication system.
motor to operate. This timer is mounted in the cab
interface compartment. Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauge (18, Figure 42-3) monitors hydraulic
Time Delay Module
oil pressure to the inlet of the hydraulic motor.
Time delay module (7, Figure 42-6), located in the
electrical interface cabinet, provides a one minute Manual Override Button
delay in the low pressure warning light circuit to allow Manual override button (17, Figure 42-3) is used to
a normally operating system to attain full grease sys- actuate the hydraulic motor to manually activate a
tem pressure without activating the warning light. If lubrication cycle.
the system fails to reach 13789 kPa (2000 psi) within
this period of time, the timer will apply 24VDC to sev- Injectors
eral relays, which will illuminate the low pressure
warning light in the overhead panel. An external Injectors deliver a controlled amount of pressurized
604K ohm resistor determines the delay period. lubricant to a designated lubrication point. Refer to
Figure 42-3 and 42-4 for the locations of each lubri-
Pump Cutoff Pressure Switch cated component.
Pump cutoff pressure switch (21, Figure 42-3) is a

normally open switch set at 20685 kPa (3000 psi).
This switch de-energizes the pump solenoid relay
when the grease line pressure reaches the switch
pressure setting, turning off the motor and pump.
FIGURE 42-4. REAR LUBRICATION INJECTORS
1. LH Lower Suspension 7. RH Anti-Sway Bar 13. RH Lower Suspension

2. LH Top Suspension 8. Rear Axle Pivot Pin 14. Grease Supply
3. LH Body Pivot Pin 9. RH Bottom Hoist Cylinder 15. Pressure Switch
4. LH Top Hoist Cylinder 10. RH Top Hoist Cylinder 13790 kPa (2000 psi)
5. LH Anti-Sway Bar 11. RH Body Pivot Pin
6. LH Bottom Hoist Cylinder 12. RH Top Suspension
SYSTEM OPERATION 6. When 20685 kPa (3000 psi) grease pressure

reaches pressure switch (4, Figure 42-6) set-
Normal Operation ting, the switch contacts will close and energize
Refer to Figure 42-5 and 42-6: relay K1 (12), removing power from grease
pump solenoid valve (5) and the pump will stop.
1. During truck operation, lubrication cycle timer The relay will remain energized until grease
(1, Figure 42-6) will energize the system at a pressure drops and the pressure switch opens
preset time interval. again or until the timer turns off.
2. The lubrication cycle timer provides a 24VDC 7. After the pump solenoid valve is de-energized,
signal through normally closed relay board (12) hydraulic pressure in the manifold drops and
used to energize pump solenoid valve (3, Fig- vent valve (11, Figure 42-5) will open, releasing
ure 42-5), allowing hydraulic oil provided by the grease pressure in the lines to the injector
truck steering pump circuit to flow to the pump banks. When this occurs, the injectors are then
motor and initiate a pumping cycle. able to recharge for the next lubrication cycle.
3. The hydraulic oil pressure from the steering cir- 8. Unloader valve (10) prevents excessive grease
cuit is reduced to 2240 to 2413 kPa (325 to 350 pressure if the pressure switch fails to close and
psi) by pressure reducing valve (4, Figure 42-5) shut off the hydraulic supply to the pump. The
before entering the motor. In addition, the unloader will open at approximately 27.6 MPa
amount of oil supplied to the pump is limited by (4000 psi).
flow control valve (6). Pump pressure can be
9. The system will remain at rest until the lubrica-
read using pressure gauge (5) mounted on the
tion cycle timer turns on and initiates a new
manifold.
grease cycle.
4. With oil flowing into the hydraulic motor, the
grease pump will operate, pumping grease from 10. During the normal lubrication cycle, if grease
the reservoir to vent valve (11) and then to pressure fails to reach 13790 kPa (2000 psi) at
injectors (13). Pressure switch (9) prevents over the pressure switch located on the rear axle
pressurization. housing, an amber indicator light will illuminate
on the overhead panel.
5. During this period, the injectors will meter the
appropriate amount of grease to each lubrica-
tion point.
FIGURE 42-5. HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

1. Hydraulic Oil Return 5. Pressure Gauge 9. Pressure Switch (NO)
2. Hydraulic Oil Supply 6. Flow Control Valve 10. Unloader Valve
3. Pump Solenoid Valve 7. Hydraulic Motor 11. Vent Valve
4. Pressure Reducing Valve 8. Grease Pump 12. Orifice
13. Injector Bank
Pressure Failure Detection Circuits 3. If a problem occurs and the system is not able
1. When the lubrication cycle is initiated, 24VDC to attain 13.8 MPa (2000 psi), then time delay
flows through relay RB6-K4 (8, Figure 42-6) N.C. module (7) will energize relay RB6-K2 after 60
contacts to one minute time delay module (7). seconds, turning on the Low Lubrication Sys-
tem Pressure warning lamp on the overhead
2. If the system is operating normally, grease pres-
display. After RB6-K2 energizes, it will ground
sure at the rear axle injector bank will rise to
the coil of RB6-K6 and allow it to energize.
pressure switch (9) setting of 13.8 MPa (2000
psi), closing the switch contacts and energizing 4. Once RB6-K6 is energized, it will latch and
relay RB6-K4 (8), removing 24 Volts from the remain latched as long as the key switch is on.
time delay module. The timer is then reset and Also, RB6-K2 will remain energized and the
no current will flow from the timer output terminal. Low Lubrication Pressure Warning light will
remain on to notify the operator a problem
exists and the system requires service.
5. The warning circuits are reset when the key
switch is turned off.
FIGURE 42-6. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
1. Lubrication Cycle Timer 6. Relay Board 6, Relay K6

2. Circuit Breaker 33 (Power Distribution Module in 7. Time Delay Module
Cab) 8. Relay Board 6, Relay K4
3. Circuit Breaker 35 (Power Distribution Module in 9. Pressure Switch (Rear Axle Injector Bank) -
Cab) 13789 kPa (2000 psi)
4. Pressure Switch (On Grease Pump) - 20685 kPa 10. Relay Board 6, Relay K2
(3000 psi) 11. Auto Lubrication Low Pressure Warning Lamp
5. Grease Pump Solenoid Valve 12. Relay Board 6, Relay K1
13. Manual Override
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
LUBRICANT REQUIRED FOR SYSTEM LUBRICANT PUMP
Grease requirements will depend on ambient tem- Pump Housing Oil Level
peratures encountered during truck operation:
The pump housing must be filled to the proper level
• Above 32°C (90°F) - Use NLGI No.2 with SAE 10W-30 motor oil. Oil level must be
multipurpose grease (MPG).
checked at 1000 hour intervals. To add oil, remove
• -32° to 32°C (-25° to 90°F) - Use NLGI No. 1 oil level plug (4, Figure 42-7) and fill housing to bot-
multipurpose grease (MPG). tom of plug hole.
• Below -32°C (-25°F) - Refer to local supplier for
extreme cold weather lubricant requirements. Pump Pressure Control
High pressure hydraulic fluid from the truck steering
SYSTEM PRIMING system is reduced to 2240 to 2413 kPa (325 to 350
The system must be full of grease and free of air psi) by the pressure reducing valve located on the
pockets to function properly. After maintenance, if manifold on top of the pump motor. This pressure
the primary or secondary lubrication lines were can be read on the gauge installed on the manifold
replaced, it will be necessary to prime the system to and must be checked occasionally to verify pressure
eject all entrapped air. is within the above limits.
1. Fill lubrication reservoir with lubricant, if neces-
sary.
2. To purge air from the main supply line, remove
the main supply line at outlet port (6, Figure 42-
7) and connect an external grease supply to the
line.
3. Remove plugs from each injector group in
sequence (right front, left front, and rear axle).
4. Using an external grease source, pump grease
until grease appears at the group of injectors
and re-install the pipe plug. Repeat for remain-
ing injector groups.
5. Remove the caps from each injector and con-
nect an external grease supply to the zerk on
the injector and pump until grease appears at
the far end of the individual grease hose or the
joint being greased.
FIGURE 42-7. PUMP CONTROLS
1. Pump Pressure 4. Oil Level Plug

Control 5. Flow Control Valve
2. Manifold 6. Outlet Port
3. Pressure Gauge 7. Manual Override
FILTER AND RESERVOIR Filter Assembly Element
Filter assembly (2, Figure 42-8) is mounted on right Filter assembly element (5, Figure 42-9) must be
upright (1) and filters the grease when the grease replaced if bypass indicator (2) shows excessive ele-
supply is refilled through the quick fill fittings. ment restriction.
Grease is pumped into the filter through filter inlet
hose (4) routed from the service center and then
flows out the filter through hose (3) to grease reser-
voir (5). Vent hose (7) purges air from the reservoir
as it is being filled and prevents a vacuum as grease
is pumped out.
Cap (6) allows the reservoir to be drained, if desired,
and a plate secured on the end of the reservoir
(frame torque tube) can be removed if the reservoir
requires cleaning.
FIGURE 42-9. FILTER ASSEMBLY
1. Housing 6. Spring
2. Bypass Indicator 7. Bowl
3. O-Ring 8. O-Ring
4. Backup Ring 9. Plug
FIGURE 42-8. FILTER AND RESERVOIR 5. Filter Assembly
Element
1. RH Upright 5. Grease Reservoir
2. Filter Assembly 6. Cap
3. Filter Outlet Hose 7. Vent Hose
4. Filter Inlet hose 8. Pump Access Door
INJECTORS (SL-1 Series H)

Injector Specifications
• Each lubrication injector services only one
grease point. In case of pump malfunction, each
injector is equipped with a covered grease fitting
to allow the use of external lubricating
equipment.
• Injector Output Volume:
Maximum Output =1.31 cc (0.08 in3)
Minimum Output = 0.13 cc (0.008 in3)
• Operating Pressure:
Minimum - 12755 kPa (1850 psi)
Maximum- 24133 kPa (3500 psi)
Recommended - 17238 kPa (2500 psi)
• Maximum Vent Pressure (Recharge):
4137 kPa (600 psi)
Injector Adjustment
The injectors may be adjusted to supply from 0.13 -
1.31 cc (0.008 - 0.08 in3) of lubricant per injection FIGURE 42-10. TYPE SL-1 INJECTOR
cycle. The injector piston travel distance determines
the amount of lubricant supplied. This travel is con- 1. Adjusting Screw 11. Spring Seat
trolled by an adjusting screw in the top of the injector 2. Locknut 12. Plunger
housing. 3. Piston Stop Plug 13. Viton Packing
4. Gasket 14. Inlet Disc
Turn adjusting screw (1, Figure 42-10) counterclock- 5. Washer 15. Viton Packing
wise to increase lubricant amount delivered and 6. Viton O-Ring 16. Washer
clockwise to decrease the lubricant amount. 7. Injector Body 17. Gasket
When the injector is not pressurized, maximum injec- Assembly 18. Adapter Bolt
tor delivery volume is attained by turning adjusting 8. Piston Assembly 19. Adapter
screw (1) fully counterclockwise until piston assembly 9. Fitting Assembly 20. Viton Packing
(8) touches the adjusting screw. At the maximum 10. Plunger Spring
delivery point, about 9.7 mm (0.38 in.) adjusting screw
NOTE: Piston assembly (8) has a visible indicator pin
threads must be showing. Decrease the delivered
at the top of the assembly to verify injector operation.
lubricant amount by turning the adjusting screw clock-
wise to limit injector piston travel. If only half the lubri- NOTE: Piston stop plug (3) must be tightened to 34-41
cant is needed, turn the adjusting screw to the point N·m (25-30 ft lbs). Adapter (19) must be tightened to
where about 4.8 mm (0.19 in.) threads are showing. 61-68 N·m (45-50 ft lbs).
The injector will be set at the minimum delivery point
with about 0.22 mm (0.009 in.) thread showing.
NOTE: The above information concerns adjustment
of injector delivery volume. The timer adjustment
must also be changed if overall lubricant delivery is
too little or too much. Injector output must not be
adjusted to less than one-fourth capacity.
INJECTOR OPERATION
STAGE 1. STAGE 3.
Injector piston (2) As injector piston (2)
is in its normal or completes its stroke,
rest position. Dis- it pushes slide valve
charge chamber (5) past passage (4),
(3) is filled with lu- cutting off further ad-
bricant from the mission of lubricant
previous cycle. (6) to passage (4)
Under the pres- and measuring
sure of incoming chamber (1). Injector
lubricant (6), slide piston (2) and slide
valve (5) is about valve (5) remain in
to open passage this position until the
(4) leading to mea- lubricant pressure in
suring chamber supply line (6) is
(1) above injector vented.
piston (2).
STAGE 2.
STAGE 4.
When slide valve
(5) uncovers pas- After venting, the in-
sage (4), lubricant jector spring ex-
(6) is admitted to pands, causing slide
measuring cham- valve (5) to move, so
ber (1) above in- that passage (4) and
jector piston (2), discharge chamber
which forces the (3) are connected by
lubricant from dis- valve port (8). Fur-
charge chamber ther expansion of the
(3) through outlet spring causes the
port (7) to the piston to move up-
bearing. ward, forcing the lu-
bricant in measuring
chamber (1) through
passag e (4) and
valve port (8) to refill
discharge chamber
(3).
The injector is now
ready for the next
cycle.
SYSTEM CHECKOUT To check the solid-state timer operation without wait-

ing for the normal timer setting, proceed as follows:
To check system operation, not including the timer,
proceed as follows: NOTE: The timer incorporates a liquid and dust-tight
1. Start the engine. cover which must be in place and secured at all times
during truck operation.
2. Actuate the test switch at the reservoir/pump
assembly. 1. Remove the dust cover.
3. The motor and pump will operate until the sys- 2. Adjust timer selector (3, Figure 42-12) to the
tem attains 20685 kPa (3000 psi). five minute interval setting
4. Once the required pressure is achieved, the .
pump motor will turn off and the system will
vent.
5. Check for pump, hose, or injector damage or
leakage when the system is pressurized.
6. After checking the system, shut the engine off.
Observe normal precautions regarding high
voltage present in the propulsion system before
attempting to repair the lubrication system.
Lubrication Cycle Timer Check
FIGURE 42-12. LUBRICATION CYCLE TIMER

(Shown With Cover Removed)
1. Timer Enclosure 3. Timer Selector
2. Red LED
3. The timer must cycle in five minutes if the truck

is operating.
NOTE: If the timer check is being made on a cold
start, the first cycle will be approximately double the
nominal setting. All subsequent cycles must be within
the selected time tolerance.
4. Perform voltage checks at the timer if the above
checks do not identify the problem.
a. Ensure that the timer ground connection is
clean and tight.
b. With the key switch on, use a voltmeter to
FIGURE 42-11. LOCATION OF LUBRICATION read the voltage between the positive and
CYCLE TIMER negative posts on the solid-state timer. A nor-
1. Cab Interface 2. Lubrication Cycle mal reading must be 18 to 26VDC, depend-
Compartment Timer ing upon whether the engine is on or not.
Lubrication Cycle Timer Adjustment 250 Hour Inspection
The timer is set at the factory for a nominal 2.5 1. Check all grease hoses from the SL-1 injectors
minute (off time) interval. Dwell time is approximately to the lubrication points. Refer to Figure 42-2.
75 seconds. A longer interval (off time) is obtained by a. Repair or replace all worn and broken hoses.
turning the timer selector to the desired position.
b. Ensure all the air is purged and all new feed
Set the timer by turning the timer selector to the 2.5 line hoses are filled with grease before send-
minute setting. Then turn the selector clockwise one ing the truck back into service.
detent at a time to the desired setting, or until the
2. Check all grease supply line hoses from the
maximum limit of 80 minutes is reached.
pump to the SL-1 injectors.
NOTE: The timer is a sealed unit. DO NOT attempt to a. Repair or replace all worn and broken supply
disassemble it. lines.
b. Ensure all air is purged and all new supply
line hoses are filled with grease before send-
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION ing the truck back into service.
Use the following maintenance procedures to ensure 3. Check the grease reservoir level.
proper system operation.
a. Fill the reservoir if low. Check the filter
10 Hour Lubrication System Inspection bypass indicator when filling the reservoir.
Replace the element if bypassing.
1. Check the grease reservoir level.
Inspect the grease level height after each shift b. Check the reservoir for contaminants. Clean,
of operation. The grease usage must be consis- if required.
tent from day-to-day operations. c. Check that all filler plugs, covers, and
Lack of lubricant usage would indicate an inop- breather vents on the reservoir are intact and
erative system. Excessive usage would indicate free of contaminants.
a broken supply line. 4. Inspect all bearing points for a bead of lubricant
2. Check the filter bypass indicator when filling the around the bearing seal.
reservoir. Replace the element if bypassing. It is good practice to manually lubricate each
3. Check all the grease hoses from the SL-1 injec- bearing point at the grease fitting provided on
tors to the lubrication points. each Injector. This will indicate if there are any
frozen or plugged bearings, and will help flush
a. Repair or replace all damaged feed line
the bearings of contaminants.
hoses.
5. System Checkout.
b. Ensure all air is purged and all new feed line
hoses are filled with grease before sending a. Remove all SL-1 injector cover caps to allow
the truck back into service. visual inspection of the injector cycle indica-
tor pins during system operation.
4. Inspect the key lubrication points for a bead of
lubricant around the seal. If a lubrication point b. Start the truck engine.
appears dry, troubleshoot and repair the prob- c. Actuate manual override switch (6, Figure
lem. 42-1). The hydraulic motor and grease pump
must operate.
d. With the system pressurized, check each NOTE: With the engine on, the lubrication system will
SL-1 injector assembly. The cycle indicator activate within five minutes. System pressure will
pin will be retracted inside the injector body. build to 20685 kPa (3000 psi) within 25-40 seconds.
e. When the system attains 20685 kPa (3000 i. If the system is working properly, the
psi), the pump will shut off and the pressure machine is ready for operation.
in the system will drop to zero, venting back
j. If the system is malfunctioning, refer to the
to the grease reservoir.
troubleshooting chart.
f. With the system vented, check all of the SL-1
injector indicator pins. All of the pins must be
visible. Replace or repair the injectors, if 1000 Hour Inspection
defective.
1. Check the pump housing oil level. Refill to the
g. Reinstall all the injector cover caps. bottom of the level plug with SAE 10W-30 motor
h. Check the timer operation. oil, if necessary
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

NOTE: If the following procedures do not correct the problem, contact a factory authorized service center.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE ACTION
Lubrication system not grounded. Correct grounding connections to pump
assembly and truck chassis.
Electrical power loss. Locate cause of power loss and repair.
24VDC power required. Ensure key
switch is on.
Timer malfunction. Replace timer assembly.
Solenoid valve malfunctioning. Replace solenoid valve assembly.
Pump Does Not Operate.
Relay malfunctioning. Replace relay.
Motor or pump malfunction. Repair or replace motor and/or pump
assembly. Refer to the Service manual for
rebuild instructions.
NOTE: On initial startup of the lubrication system, the timing capacitor will not
contain a charge. Therefore, the first timing cycle will be about double in length
compared to the normal interval. Subsequent timer cycles must be as specified.
Low lubricant supply. Dirt in reservoir, pump inlet clogged, filter
Pump Will Not Prime. clogged.
Air trapped in lubricant supply line. Prime system to remove trapped air.
Lubricant supply line leaking. Check lines and connections to repair
leakage.
Pump Will Not Build
Vent valve leaking. Clean or replace vent valve.
Pressure.
Pump worn or scored. Repair or replace pump assembly. Refer
to the Service manual for rebuild instruc-
tions.
NOTE: During operation, the injector indicator stem will move into the body of the
injector when pressure builds properly. When the system vents (pressure
release), the indicator stem will again move out into the adjusting yoke.
Malfunctioning injector - usually Replace individual injector assembly.
Injector Indicator Stem indicated by the pump building
Does Not Operate. pressure and then venting.
All injectors inoperative - pump Service and/or replace pump assembly.
build up not sufficient to cycle injec- Refer to the Service manual for rebuild
tors. instructions.
No system pressure to pump motor. Check hydraulic hose from steering sys-
No 24VDC signal at pump solenoid. tem.
Pressure reducing valve set too Determine problem in 24VDC electric sys-
Pressure Gauge Does Not tem.
low.
Register Pressure.
24V Relay (RB7K8 or RB7K5) may Refer to Pressure Control Valve Adjust-
be defective. ment.
Replace relay.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE ACTION
Pump Pressure Builds No signal at solenoid. Check timer.

Very Slowly Or Not At All.
Turn on electric power to pump. Power

Controller Does Not LED must light, pump on LED must light
Operate. No electric power to controller.
when manual lubrication is pressed.
Pump On LED Lights, But

Load Connected To Printed circuit board failure. Remove and replace.
Terminals 3 & 4 Will Not
Energize.
Load Connected To Printed circuit board failure or key- Remove and replace.
Terminals 3 & 4 pad failure.
Energized, But Pump On
LED Does Not Light.
Controller memory mode is off. Switch controller memory mode to on.
Bearing Points
Excessively Lubricated.
Injector output adjustment setting Readjust to lower setting.
too high.
Timer/controller cycle time setting Set to longer cycle time or re-evaluate

too low. lubrication requirements.
Injector output adjustment setting Readjust injector output setting.

too low.
Bearing Points Are Not
Sufficiently Lubricated.
Timer/controller cycle time setting Set to shorter cycle time or re-evaluate

does not deliver lubricant often lubrication requirements.
enough.
System too large for pump output. Calculate system requirements per
planning manual.
OM5037 06/06 Specifications - Section 50
Page 50-1
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The Komatsu model 730E dump truck is an electric drive, off-highway, rear dump truck whose gross vehicle weight
is 324,322 kg (715,000 lbs) rated for a nominal payload of 185 t (203 tons).
ENGINE POWER STEERING

The Komatsu 730E dump truck is powered by a The Komatsu 730E dump truck is equipped with a
Komatsu SSA16V159 engine rated at 2000 HP full-time power steering system, which provides posi-
(1492 kW). tive steering control with a minimum of effort by the
operator. The system includes nitrogen-charged
ALTERNATOR (GE GTA-22) accumulators which automatically provide emer-
The diesel engine drives an alternator mounted in- gency power if the steering hydraulic pressure is
line with the engine. The Alternating Current (AC) reduced below an established minimum.
output of the alternator is rectified to Direct Current
(DC) and sent to the DC drive wheel motors. DYNAMIC RETARDING
Dynamic retarding is used to slow the truck during
WHEEL MOTORS (GE 788) normal operation or control the speed coming down a
The output of the alternator supplies electrical energy grade. The dynamic retarding ability of the DC elec-
to the two wheel motors attached to the rear axle tric system is controlled by the operator through the
housing. The two wheel motors convert electrical activation of the retarder pedal in the operator’s cab
energy back to mechanical energy through built-in and by setting the RSC (Retarder Speed Control).
gear trains within the wheel motor assembly. The Dynamic retarding is automatically activated if the
direction of the wheel motors is controlled by a for- truck goes to a preset overspeed setting.
ward or reverse hand selector switch located on a
console to the right side of the operator. BRAKE SYSTEM
The wheel service brakes are caliper/dry disc brakes
BLOWER applied by an all hydraulic actuation system.
The blower supplies cooling air for the rectifiers, AC Depressing the brake pedal actuates wheel-speed
alternator, and to both wheel motors, where it is then single disc front brakes and armature-speed dual
exhausted to the atmosphere. disc rear brakes. The rear brakes can also be acti-
vated by operating a switch on the instrument panel.
OPERATOR'S CAB All wheel brakes will be applied automatically if the
The operator's cab for the Komatsu 730E dump truck system pressure decreases below a preset mini-
has been engineered for operator comfort and to mum.
allow for efficient and safe operation of the truck. The parking brake is a caliper/disc type, mounted on
The cab provides for wide visibility, with an integral each rear wheel motor, and is spring-applied and
four-post Rollover Protective Structure/Falling Object hydraulically-released with wheel speed application
Protective Structure (ROPS/FOPS), and an protection (will not apply with the truck moving.)
advanced analog operator environment. It includes a
tinted safety-glass windshield and power-operated SUSPENSION
side windows, a deluxe interior with a fully adjustable Hydrair®II suspension cylinders, located at each
seat with lumbar support, a fully adjustable/tilt steer- wheel, provide a smooth and comfortable ride for the
ing wheel, controls mounted within easy reach of the operator and dampens shock loads to the chassis
operator, and an analog instrument panel which pro- during loading and operation.
vides the operator with all instruments and gauges,
which are necessary to control and/or monitor the
truck's operating systems.
Specifications - Section 50 06/06 OM5037
Page 50-2
730E MAJOR COMPONENTS

OM5037 06/06 Specifications - Section 50
Page 50-3
SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are for the standard 730E dump truck. Customer options may change this listing.
ENGINE SERVICE CAPACITIES

Komatsu SSA16V159 Liters. . . U.S. Gallons
Number of Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Crankcase (includes lube oil filters)
Operating Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Stroke Komatsu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rated Brake HP. . 1491 kW (2000 HP) @ 1900 RPM Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . 409. . . . . . . . . . . .108
Flywheel HP . . . . 1388 kW (1860 HP) @ 1900 RPM Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3217 . . . . . . . . . . .850
Weight (Wet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5294 kg (11,670 lbs) Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . 731 . . . . . . . . . . .193
Wheel Motor Gear Box. . . .40/Wheel . . .10.5/Wheel
ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEM
STATEX III w/Fuelsaver. . . . . . . . . . AC/DC Current HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electric GTA - 22 Pumps:
Motorized Wheels . . . . . . . . . . General Electric 788* Hoist (gear-type). . . . . . . . . . .513 l/min (135.6 GPM)
Standard Gear Ratio* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.825:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . at 17240 kPa (2500 psi) @ 1900 rpm
Maximum Speed . . . . . . . . . . . 34.6 mph (55.7 km/h) Steering/Brake (vane-type). . . . . 235 l/min (62 GPM)
*NOTE: Wheel motor application depends upon GVW, haul road . . . . . . . . . . . at 18960 kPa (2750 psi) @ 1900 RPM
grade, haul road length, rolling resistance, and other parameters.
KOMATSU & G.E. must analyze each job condition to assure
Relief Pressure-Hoist . . . . . . . .17240 kPa (2500 psi)
proper application. Relief Pressure-Steering . . . . .27580 kPa (4000 psi)
Hoist . . . . . . . . Two Three-Stage Hydraulic Cylinders
DYNAMIC RETARDING
Electric Dynamic Retarding . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tank . . . . . . . Vertical - Cylindrical, Non-Pressurized
Maximum Retarding . . . . . . . . . 2759 kW (3700 HP) Service Capacity . . . . . . . . 731 Liters (193 U.S. Gal)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . With Continuous Rated Blown Grids Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . In-line Replaceable Elements
. . Two-Speed Overspeed & Extended Range Retard- Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single, Full Flow, 100 Mesh
ing Hoist and Steering High-Pressure Filters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Retarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual, Full Flow, Seven Micron
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beta 12 rating = 200
BATTERY ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Batteries . Bumper-Mounted in Polyethylene Boxes SERVICE BRAKES
. . . . . . . . . . Four 12-Volt Batteries in Series/Parallel Actuation . . . . . . . All Hydraulic - Caliper/Disc
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Ampere-Hour Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Rear)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With Disconnect Switch Type . . . . . . . . . Single Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Disc
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . 24-Volt, 220 Ampere Output . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Speed . . . . . .Armature Speed
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-Volt
STEERING
Starters (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-Volt
Turning Circle (SAE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0 m (92 ft)
Twin hydraulic cylinders with accumulator assist to
provide constant rate steering.
Emergency power steering automatically provided by
accumulators (meets SAE J1511).
Specifications - Section 50 06/06 OM5037
Page 50-4
These specifications are for the 730E dump truck without trolley assist. Specifications for trolley trucks will be dif-
ferent.
STANDARD DUMP BODY* WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
Capacity: Empty Vehicle Kilograms
Struck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 m³ . . . . . 101 yds³ (Pounds)
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,840 . . . . (147,357)
Heaped @ 2:1 (SAE). . . . .111 m³. . . . . 145 yds³ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,752 . . . . . . . (162,593)
Width (inside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 m (22 ft 6 in.) Total (100% fuel) . . . . . . 140,592. . . . . . . (309,950)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.08 m (6 ft 10 in.) Standard Komatsu Body . 25,612. . . . . . . . (61,000)
Loading Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 m (18 ft 5 in.) Standard Tire Weight. . . . 18,371. . . . . . . . (40,500)
Dumping Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45° Loaded Vehicle Kilograms . . . (Pounds)

* Optional capacity dump bodies are available. Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . 107,026. . . . . . . 235,950)
Rear Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . 217,296. . . . . . . 479,050)
Total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,322 . . . . . . (715,000)
TIRES Nominal Payload . . . . . 183,730. . . . . . . (405,050)
Radial Tires (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.00 R57
Rock Service, Deep Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . Tubeless
*Nominal payload is defined by Komatsu America
Rims . (Patented Phase II New Generation™ Rims) Corporation’s payload policy documentation. In gen-
Tires and Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interchangeable eral, the nominal payload must be adjusted for the
specific vehicle configuration and site application.
The figures above are provided for basic product
description purposes. Please contact your Komatsu
distributor for specific application requirements.
OM6008 08/06 Payload Meter III - Section 60
Page 60-1
PAYLOAD METER III

SECTION 60
INDEX
PAYLOAD METER III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Data Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
Data Gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-5
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Suspension Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-6
Payload Operator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Speed Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Body-Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Brake Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-7
Key Switch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Payload Meter Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Load Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-8
Wiring and Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-9
TCI Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-9
OPERATOR’S DISPLAY AND SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Reading the Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Reading the Load Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Using the Operator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Using the Load and Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Total Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-10
Total Load Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11

Payload Meter III - Section 60 08/06 OM6008
Page 60-2
Clearing the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
Viewing Live Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
Other Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11
PAYLOAD OPERATION AND CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Description of Haul Cycle States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Haul Cycle Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-12
Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Carry Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
SOURCES FOR PAYLOAD ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Payload Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Swingloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Speed and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
HAUL CYCLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Haul Cycle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15
Haul Cycle Warning Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-16
M: Haul Cycle Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
N: Sensor Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Frame Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Sprung Weight Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Maximum Speed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
Fault Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
PC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
Installing the PLM III Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
DOWNLOADING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20
PLM III SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-21
Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-21

Page 60-3
Displayed Payload Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Time Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Connection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-21
Connecting to the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Configure the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-22
Setting the Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Gauge Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Frame Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Truck Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Komatsu Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Setting the Komatsu Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-23
Clean Truck Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-24
Inclinometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-24
DATA ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Creating a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Truck Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-25
Sorting on Date Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-26
Sorting on Time Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-26
Payload Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-27
Creating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-27
Summary - One Page Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-28
Detailed - Multi-Page Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-28
Creating Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
CSV Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-29
Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-31
Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-31
Deleting Haul Cycle Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-31
Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-32
Deleting Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-32

Page 60-4
NOTES
Page 60-5
PAYLOAD METER III

INTRODUCTION Data Gathering
Windows 95/98/NT software is available to down-
Payload Meter III (PLM III) measures, displays and
load, store, and view payload and fault information.
records the weight of material being carried by an off-
The PC software will download an entire truck fleet
highway truck. The system generally consists of a
into one Paradox database file. Users can query the
payload meter, a gauge display, deck-mounted
database by date, time, truck type, and truck number
lights, and sensors. The primary sensors are four
to produce reports, graphs, and export the data. The
suspension pressures and an inclinometer. Other
software can export the data in '.CSV' format that can
inputs include a body-up signal, brake lock signal,
be easily imported into most spreadsheet applica-
and speed.
tions. The Windows software is not compatible with
Data Summary the Payload Meter II system.
5208 haul cycles can be stored in memory. The fol- It is important that each payload meter be configured
lowing information is recorded for each haul cycle: for each truck using the PC software. The information
• Payload for frame serial number and truck number is used by
the database program to organize the payload data.
• Operator ID number (0000-9999) In addition, the payload meter must be configured to
• Distance traveled loaded and empty make calculations for the proper truck model.
Improper configuration can lead to data loss and
• The amount of time spent empty run/stop,
inaccurate payload calculations.
loading, loaded run/stop, and dumping
• Maximum speed loaded and empty with time of
day
• Average speed loaded and empty
• Empty carry-back load
• Haul-cycle, loading, dumping start time of day
• Peak positive and peak negative frame torque
with time of day
• Peak sprung load with time of day
• Tire ton-mph for each front and average per rear
tires
The payload meter stores lifetime data that cannot be
erased. This data includes:
• Top five maximum payloads and time stamps.
• Top five positive and negative frame torque and
time stamps
• Top five maximum speeds and time stamps
Page 60-6
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
System Diagram
Suspension Pressure Sensors Operator Display

PLM III uses a two-wire pressure sensor. The range The speedometer/display gauge is used as a speed-
for the pressure sensor is 281 kPa (4000 psi) and the ometer and payload display. The top display is used
overload limit is 700 kPa (0000 psi). One wire to the for speed and can display metric (km/h) or English
sensor is the supply voltage and the other is the sig- (mph) units. Grounding terminal #4 on the back of
nal. The 0-4000 psi range is converted into an electri- the speedometer will switch the meter to display met-
cal current between 4-20 ma. The supply voltage for ric units. Leaving terminal #4 unconnected will cause
the sensor is nominally +18 VDC. Each pressure the gauge to display English units. The speedometer
sensor has an 3000 mm (118 in.) length of cable. can be adjusted using a calibration potentiometer in
The cable is specially shielded and reinforced to pro- the back just like existing speedometers.
vide mechanical strength and electronic noise immu-
The payload meter uses the lower display for pay-
nity.
load information. The normal display mode shows
Inclinometer the current payload. The display can be changed to
show the load and total tons counter or the operator
The inclinometer is used to increase the accuracy of ID. Using the operator switch on the dash panel, the
load calculations on an incline. The inclinometer current suspension pressures and incline can be dis-
uses three wires. For the sensor, red is the +18 VDC played. The units for display are set using the PC
supply voltage, black is ground, and the white is the software. Payloads can be displayed in short tons,
signal. The incline signal is a voltage between 1 and long tons, or metric tons.
4 volts. Zero degrees of incline is represented by 2.6
VDC on the signal line. The voltage signal will be
decreased by 0.103 VDC for every degree of nose
up incline.
Page 60-7
Payload Operator Switch Payload Meter
The payload operator switch is used to set, view, and The payload meter is housed in a black aluminum
clear the total load counter and total ton counter. It is housing. There is a small window on the face of the
also used to enter the operator ID number (0-9999). unit. Status and active alarm codes can be viewed
This switch can also be used to view the suspension through the window. During normal operation, a two-
pressures and inclinometer. The payload meter oper- digit display flashes 0 back and forth. Active fault
ator switch is located on the dashboard. It is a two- codes will be displayed for two seconds. These
way momentary switch. The top position is the codes are typically viewed using the laptop computer
SELECT position. The SELECT position is used to connected to the serial communications port.
step through the different displays. The lower posi-
There is one 40-pin connector on the payload meter.
tion is the SET position. The SET position is used to
A jack-screw is used to hold the payload meter and
set the operator ID or clear the load and total ton
wire harness connector housings together. This
counters. Normally the inputs from the switch to the
screw requires a 4mm or 5/32 hex wrench. The cor-
payload meter are open circuit. The switch momen-
rect tightening torque for this screw is 2.8 N·m (25 lb-
tarily connects the circuit to ground.
in.). Four bolts hold the payload meter housing to its
Speed Input mounting bracket in the cab.
PLM III uses a speed signal to calculate speed, dis- The circuit board inside the payload meter housing is
tance, and other performance data. This input is criti- made from multi-layer, dual-sided surface-mount
cal to the proper operation of the system. PLM III electronics. There are no field serviceable compo-
receives this signal from the speedometer/operator nents inside. The electronics are designed to with-
display on the dashboard. The same signal displayed stand the harsh operating environment of the mining
to the operator is used by the system. Distance cal- industry. Opening the payload meter housing will
culations are made based on the rolling radius of the result in voiding the warranty.
tires for a particular truck.
Communications Ports
Body-Up Switch The payload meter has two RS232 serial communi-
The body-up input signal is received from a magnetic cations ports and two CAN ports. Connections for the
switch located on the inside of the truck frame, for- two serial ports are available inside the payload
ward the pivot pin of the truck body. This is the same meter junction box. The two CAN ports are available
switch typically used for input to the drive system. for future electronics systems.
When the body is down, the switch closes and com- Serial port #1 is used to communicate with the dash-
pletes the circuit to 71-control power. 24 VDC indi- board display. It is also used to connect to the laptop
cates the body is down. Open circuit indicates that computer. The display gauge will remain blank when
the body is up. the PC is using the serial port. This port initially oper-
ates with serial settings at 9600,8,N,1. These set-
Brake Lock Switch tings change automatically to increase the
The brake lock is used to lock the rear brakes on the communications rate when the PC is using the port.
truck. It is necessary for the accurate calculation of This serial port uses a three-wire hardware connec-
swingloads during the loading process. Without the tion.
brake lock applied, the payload meter will not calcu- Serial port #2 is used to communicate to other on-
late swingloads during the loading process. Without board electronics like Modular Mining's Dispatch®
the brake lock, the payload meter will assume that system or the scoreboard from Komatsu. This port
the truck was loaded using a continuous loader and uses a three-wire hardware connection. Connections
flag the haul cycle record. All other functions will be to this serial port need to be approved by Komatsu.
normal regardless of brake lock usage. The brake Several protocol options are available and detailed
lock input comes from the switch located on the dash technical information is available, depending on
panel. The brake lock switch connects the circuit to licensing.
ground. Open circuit indicates brake lock off. Ground
indicates brake lock on.
Page 60-8
Key Switch Input Load Lights

PLM III monitors the status of the key switch. 24VDC PLM III uses load lights to indicate to the shovel
indicates that the key switch is ON. Open indicates operator the approximate weight of the material in
the key switch is OFF. The payload meter does not the truck. The load lights are illuminated only when
receive its electrical power from the key switch cir- the brake lock is applied. The lights are controlled by
cuit. The payload meter will remain on for several the payload meter through a series of relays in the
seconds after the key switch is removed. When the junction box. The payload meter controls the relays
key switch power is removed, payload meter per- with 24 VDC outputs. A 24 VDC signal from the pay-
forms a series of internal memory operations before load meter powers the relay coil and connects bat-
turning itself off. To allow for these operations, the tery power to the load light. When the relay is not
key switch must be turned off for at least 15 seconds powered by the payload meter, a pre-warm resistor
before turning the key switch back ON. The payload connects the load light to a reduced voltage. This cir-
meter will automatically reset itself without error if not cuit pre-warms the load light filaments and reduces
enough time is given for these operations. The dis- the inrush current when the light is fully illuminated.
play may blink briefly. This lengthens the operating life of the load lights.
Payload Meter Power The load lights progressively indicate to the shovel
operator the approximate weight of the material in
The payload meter receives its power from the bat- the truck.
tery circuit on the truck. Removing battery power
from the payload meter before removing the key A flashing green light indicates the next swingload
switch and waiting 15 seconds may result in lost haul will make the measured load greater than 50% of
cycle data. The payload meter turns itself off approxi- rated load. A solid green light indicates that the cur-
mately 15 seconds after the key switch power is rent load is greater than 50% of rated capacity.
removed. Some haul cycle data will be lost if battery A flashing amber light indicates the next swingload
power is removed before waiting 15 seconds. The will make the measured load greater than 90% of
payload meter system operates at a nominal voltage rated load. A solid amber light indicates that the cur-
of 24 VDC at 1 to 2 amps, depending on options. The rent load is greater than 90% of rated capacity.
payload meter is designed to turn itself off if the sup-
ply voltage rises above 36 VDC. The payload meter A flashing red light indicates the next swingload will
is also protected by a 5 amp circuit breaker located in make the measured load greater than 105% of rated
the junction box. load. A solid red light indicates that the current load is
greater than 105% of rated capacity.
Power to the load lights comes from the same battery
circuit. The load lights are powered through a relay. The optimal loading target is a solid green and amber
The key switch circuit controls the relay. The load lights with a flashing red light. This indicates that the
lights are also protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker load is between 90% and 105% of rated load for the
in the junction box. truck and the next swingload will load the truck over
105%.
Page 60-9
Wiring and Termination TCI Outputs
Most of the PLM III truck connections use a heavy- The GE drive system on the 930E/960E requires
duty cable. This yellow multi-conductor cable uses a information from the payload meter regarding the
16awg, finely stranded wire designed for continuous loaded condition of the truck. There are three outputs
motion operations. The conductors are protected by from the payload meter to GE to indicate the relative
a foil and braided shield for electronic noise immunity load in the truck. 24VDC on the 73MSL circuit indi-
and physical strength. This wire is typically termi- cates that the load is 70% of rated load. 24VDC on
nated with a #10 ring terminal. Most connections for the 73FSL circuit indicates the truck is 100% loaded.
the PLM III system are made in the payload meter The 73OSL circuit is not currently used.
junction box.
Page 60-10
OPERATOR’S DISPLAY AND SWITCH Using the Operator ID

The current operator ID number is recorded with
Reading the Speedometer
each haul cycle. The number can be between 0 and
The top window of the speedometer/display gauge is 9999.
the speedometer section. The display shows the
To set the Operator ID:
speed indicated by the frequency being received by
the gauge. This can be adjusted using the potentiom- 1. Press the SELECT switch until Id= is displayed.
eter on the back of the gauge. In addition, the units 2. Hold the SET button until 0000 is displayed.
for the display can be changed. Terminal #4 controls The first digit will be flashing.
the displayed units. If #4 is grounded, the display will
3. Press the SET button again to change the digit.
be metric. If terminal #4 is left open, the display will
be in English units. 4. Press the SELECT button once to adjust the
second digit.
Reading the Load Display 5. Use the SET button again to change the digit.
The lower display on the speedometer/display gauge 6. Press the SELECT button once to adjust the
is used for payload information. The SELECT posi- third digit.
tion on the operator switch allows the user to scroll 7. Use the SET button again to change the digit.
through a number of useful displays. The order for 8. Press the SELECT button once to adjust the
the displays is as follows: fourth digit.
• PL= Payload 9. Use the SET button again to change the digit
10. Press the SELECT button one more time to
• Id= Operator ID enter the ID.
If no buttons are pressed for 30 seconds, the display
• tL= Total Shift Tons will return to normal operation. The number being
entered will be lost and the ID number returns to the
• LC= Shift Load Counter previous ID number.
• LF= Left Front Suspension Pressure Using the Load and Ton Counter
PLM III allows the truck operator to monitor and track
• rF= Right Front Suspension Pressure the total tons hauled and the number of haul cycles
during the shift. This display can be cleared at the
• Lr= Left Rear Suspension Pressure beginning of each shift to allow the operator to record
how many loads and tons have been hauled during
• rr= Right Rear Suspension Pressure the shift.
• In= Inclinometer Total Ton Counter

The display holds the displayed information until the The total ton counter records the number of tons
SELECT switch is pressed again. The suspension hauled since the last time it was cleared. This display
pressures, inclinometer, and payload displays are is in 100’s of tons. For example, if the display shows
based on current sensor inputs.
432, the total tons is 43,200. This display can
Communications to the display use the same serial be cleared at the beginning of each shift to allow the
link as the download connection. Whenever another operator to record how many tons have been hauled
computer is connected to serial port #1 to download during the shift. The units are selected using the PC
or configure the system, the lower display will blank. software.
This is not the same connection used by mine dis-
patch systems. • To view the total ton count, press and release the
SELECT switch until tL= is displayed on the
gauge.
Page 60-11
Total Load Counter The inclinometer displays whole degrees of incline.
Positive incline is truck nose up. The gauge will
The total load counter records the number of loads
quickly display the type of information shown every
hauled since the last time it was cleared. This display
10 seconds. For example, if the left-front pressure is
can be cleared at the beginning of each shift to allow
the operator to record how many loads have been being displayed,Lf= will flash on the display every
hauled during the shift.
minute. Only the payload display, PL= does not
• To view the total load counter, press and release display this information.
the SELECT switch until LC= is displayed on • Left Front Pressure - To display the pressure in
the gauge. the left-front suspension, press and release the
Clearing the Counters SELECT switch until Lf= is displayed.
Clearing the total ton counter or total load counter • Right Front Pressure - To display the pressure in
clears both records. the right-front suspension, press and release the
To clear the total ton and total load counter: SELECT switch until rf= is displayed.
• Left Rear Pressure - To display the pressure in
1. Press the SELECT switch until tL= or
the left-rear suspension, press and release the
LC= is displayed. SELECT switch until Lr= is displayed.
2. Hold the SET button until the display clears. • Right Rear Pressure - To display the pressure in
the right-rear suspension, press and release the
Viewing Live Sensor Data
The display can also be used to quickly show the cur-
SELECT switch until rr= is displayed.
rent readings from the four suspension pressure sen- • Inclinometer - To display the truck incline, press
sors and the inclinometer. This can be used during
regularly scheduled service periods to check the
and release the SELECT switch until In= is
displayed.
state of the suspensions. These displays are live and
will update as the values change. Other Display Messages
The live displays cannot be cleared and the SET but- On startup of the payload meter system, the gauge
ton will have no effect. display will scroll the truck type that the PLM III is
The units for the display are controlled by the config- configured for. For example, on a 930E, the gauge
uration of the payload meter. If the payload meter is will scroll, ----930E---.
set to display metric units, the pressures will be dis-
played in tenths of kPa (PSI). For example, if the dis- If the PLM III encounters memory problems, it will
play shows 202, the actual value is 20.2 kPa (. display ER88 where 88 is the specific mem-
If the payload meter is set to display short tons, the ory error. In this very rare circumstance, the system
pressures will be displayed in lbs/in2 (psi). Multiply by must be turned off for 30 seconds and restarted.
14.2 to convert kg/cm2 to psi. (example -- 1kg/cm2 x
14.2 = 14.2 psi). There is no way to detect the units
setting for the gauge without the PC software.
Page 60-12
PAYLOAD OPERATION AND The payload meter switches from loading to maneu-
CALCULATION vering as soon as the truck begins moving. The
maneuvering zone is 160m and is designed to allow
Description of Haul Cycle States the operator to reposition the truck under the shovel.
More payload can be added anytime within the
The typical haul cycle can be broken down into eight
maneuvering zone. Once the truck travels 160m (0.1
distinct stages or states. Each state requires the pay-
miles), the payload meter switches to the final_zone
load meter to make different calculations and store
and begins calculating payload. If the body is raised
different data.
while the payload meter is in the maneuvering state,
States or stages of a typical haul cycle: the no_final_load flag will be recorded in the haul
cycle record, no payload will be calculated, and the
1. Tare Zone
meter will switch to the dumping state.
2. Empty
3. Loading While in the final_zone moving faster than 5 km/h (3
mph), the payload meter calculates the loaded sprung
4. Maneuvering weight of the truck. The same advanced algorithm is
5. Final Zone used to calculate the empty and loaded sprung
6. Hauling weights. The payload meter will switch from the
7. Dumping final_zone to the dumping state if the body-up signal
is received. If the truck has moved for less than one
8. After Dump minute in the final_zone, the payload meter will calcu-
late the final payload using an averaging technique
Haul Cycle Description
which may be less accurate. If this happens, the
A new haul cycle is started after the load has been average_load flag will be recorded in the haul cycle.
dumped from the previous cycle. The payload meter
The payload meter switches to the dumping state
will stay in the after_dump state for 10 seconds to
when the dump body rises. The payload meter will
confirm that the load has actually been dumped. If
switch from dumping to after_dump when the dump
the current payload is less than 20% of rated load,
body comes back down.
the payload meter will switch to the tare_zone and
begin calculating a new empty tare. If, after dumping, From the after_dump, the payload meter will switch
the payload has not dropped below 20% of the rated to one of three states:
load, the meter will return to the maneuvering or
1. If the average payload is greater than 20% of
hauling states. In this case, the false_body_up flag
rated load and no final payload has been calcu-
will be recorded in the haul cycle record.
lated, the payload meter will return to the
While in the tare_zone state, and moving faster than 5 maneuvering state. After the truck travels 160m
km/h (3 mph), the payload meter calculates the empty (0.1 mile), the meter will switch to the final_zone
sprung weight of the truck. This tare value will be sub- and attempt to calculate the payload again. The
tracted from the loaded sprung weight to calculate the false_body_up flag will be recorded in the haul
final payload. The payload meter will switch from the cycle record.
tare_zone or empty to the loading state if swingloads 2. If the average payload is greater than 20% of
are detected. By raising the dump body while in the rated load and the final payload has been calcu-
empty state, the payload meter can be manually lated, the payload meter will switch back to the
switched back to the tare_zone to calculate a new tare. hauling state. The false_body_up flag will be
From the empty state, the payload meter will switch recorded in the haul cycle record.
to the loading state through one of two means. If the 3. If the average payload is less than 20% of rated
brake lock is applied, the payload meter will be ana- load, the payload meter will switch to the
lyzing the suspension pressures to detect a swing- tare_zone and begin to calculate a new empty
load. If a swingload is detected, the meter will switch tare.
to the loading state. The minimum size for swingload
detection is 10% of rated load. Swingload detection
usually takes 4-6 seconds. The second method to
switch from empty to loading is through continuous
loading. This can happen if the brake lock is not used
during loading. If the load increases above 50% of
rated load for 10 seconds without the brake lock
applied, the meter will switch to loading and record
the continuous_loading flag in the haul cycle.
Page 60-13
Load Calculation SOURCES FOR PAYLOAD ERROR
The final load calculation is different from the last
Payload Error
swingload calculation. The accuracy of the swing load
calculation depends on loading conditions and the The number one source of error in payload calcula-
position of the truck during loading. The last swing- tion is improperly serviced suspensions. The payload
load calculation is not the value recorded in memory meter calculates payload by measuring differences in
as the final load. The final load is determined by a the sprung weight of the truck when it is empty and
series of calculations made while the truck is traveling when it is loaded. The sprung weight is the weight of
to the dump site. the truck supported by the suspensions. The only
method for determining sprung weight is by measur-
Carry Back ing the pressure of the nitrogen gas in the suspen-
sions. If the suspensions are not properly
Carry back is calculated as the difference between
maintained, the payload meter cannot determine an
the current truck tare and the clean truck tare. The
accurate value for payload. The two critical factors
clean truck tare is calculated using the PC software.
are proper oil height and proper nitrogen charge.
When the suspensions are serviced or changes are
made that may affect the sprung weight of the truck, If the suspensions are overcharged, the payload
a new clean truck tare must be calculated. meter will not be able to determine the empty sprung
weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
Measurement Accuracy able to travel up and down as the truck drives empty.
Payload measurements are typically repeatable The pressure in an overcharged suspension can
within 1%. Accuracy for a particular scale test push the suspension rod to full extension. In this
depends on specific combinations of pressure sen- case, the pressure inside the cylinder does not accu-
sors and payload meters as well as the specifics of rately represent the force necessary to support that
each scale test. Comparisons from different scale portion of the truck.
tests are often made without considering the differ- If the suspensions are undercharged, the payload
ences introduced by the specific installation and meter will not be able to determine the loaded sprung
operation of the scales for each test. In addition, weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
each pressure sensor and payload meter introduces able to travel up and down as the truck drives loaded.
it's own non-linearity. Each truck becomes an individ- If the pressure in an undercharged suspension can-
ual combination of sensors and payload meter. not support the load, the suspension will collapse
Errors from these sources can introduce up to a ±7% and make metal-to-metal contact. In this case, the
bias in the payload meter calculations for a specific pressure inside the cylinder does not accurately rep-
scale test, for an individual truck. resent the force necessary to support that portion of
Because the PLM III calculates a new empty tare for the truck.
each payload, a detailed scale test must weigh the Low oil height can also introduce errors by not cor-
trucks empty and loaded for each haul cycle. Using a rectly supporting a loaded truck. This is why the cor-
simple average of two or three empty truck weights rect oil height and nitrogen charge are the most
as an empty tare for the entire scale test will intro- critical factors in the measurement of payload. If the
duce significant error when comparing scale weights suspensions are not properly maintained, accurate
to PLM III weights. payload measurement is not possible. In addition,
suspension maintenance is very important to the life
of the truck.
Page 60-14
Loading Conditions HAUL CYCLE DATA

The final load calculation of the PLM III system is not PLM III records and stores data in its on-board flash
sensitive to loading conditions. The final load is cal- memory. This memory does not require a separate
culated as the truck travels away from the shovel. battery. The data is available through the download
Variations in road conditions and slope are compen- software.
sated for in the complex calculations performed by
the payload meter. PLM III can store 5208 payload records. When the
memory is full, the payload meter will erase the old-
Pressure Sensors est 745 payload records and continue recording.
Small variations in sensors can also contribute to PLM III can store 512 alarm records in memory.
payload calculation error. Every pressure sensor is When the memory is full, the payload meter will
slightly different. The accuracy differences of individ- erase the oldest 312 alarm records and continue
ual sensors along the range from 0 to 27579 kPa (0 recording.
to 4000 psi) can add or subtract from payload mea- All data is calculated and stored in metric units within
surements. This is also true of the sensor input cir- the payload meter. The data is downloaded and
cuitry within individual payload meters. These stored in metric units within the Paradox database on
differences can stack up 7% in extreme cases. the PC. The analysis program converts units for dis-
These errors will be consistent and repeatable for plays, graphs, and reports.
specific combinations of payload meters and sensors
on a particular truck. The units noted in the Table 1 are the actual units
stored in the data file. The value for the haul cycle
Swingloads start time is the number of seconds since January 1,
1970 to the start of the haul cycle. All other event
Swingload calculations can be affected by conditions
times are referenced in seconds since the haul cycle
at the loading site. Parking the truck against the berm
start time. The PC download and analysis program
or large debris can cause the payload meter to inac-
converts these numbers into dates and times for
curately calculate individual swingloads. While the
graphs and reports.
PLM III system uses an advanced calculation algo-
rithms to determine swingloads, loading site condi-
tions can affect the accuracy.
Speed and Distance

The payload meter receives the same speed signal
as the speedometer. This signal is a frequency that
represents the speed of the truck. The payload meter
uses this frequency to calculate speeds and dis-
tances. The meter assumes a single value for the
rolling radius of the tire. The rolling radius may
change at difference speeds by growing larger at
higher speeds. The actual rolling radius of the tire will
also change between a loaded and empty truck. The
payload meter does not compensate for these
changes.
NOTE: Earlier 730E and 830E models are subject to
incorrect speed data due to electrical interference.
The incorrect speeds are generated while the truck is
stopped. An attenuator was added to newer
production models to prevent this error from
occurring. A kit was released to update older PLM III
systems with the attenuator. Consult your area
service representative for details.
Page 60-15
Haul Cycle Data
The following information is recorded for each haul cycle:
Table 1: HAUL CYCLE DATA

Data Unit Remark
Truck # alpha- Up to 22 characters can be stored in this field to identify the truck. Typically this field will be just the
numeric truck number.
Haul Cycle Start Date/Time seconds Number of seconds from 1/1/70 to the start of the haul cycle, haul cycle starts when the meter transi-
tions from dumping to empty state after the previous haul cycle, download program converts seconds
into date and time for display.
Payload tons Stored as metric, download program allows for conversion to short or long tons.
Number of Swingloads number The number of swingloads detected by the payload meter.
Operator ID number This is a 4 digit number that can be entered by the operator at the start of the shift.
Warning Flags alpha Each letter represents a particular warning message about the haul cycle. Details are located on page
19.
Carry-back load tons The difference between the latest empty tare and the clean truck tare.
Empty haul time seconds Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck moving.
Empty stop time seconds Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck stopped.
Loading time seconds Number of seconds in the loading state.
Loaded haul time seconds Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck moving.
Loaded stop time seconds Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck stopped.
Dumping time seconds Number of seconds in the dumping state.
Loading start time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to when the meter transitions from empty to loading
state.
Dump start time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the meter switches from loaded to
dumping state.
Loaded haul distance m Distance traveled while loaded.
Empty haul distance m Distance traveled while empty.
Loaded max speed km/h Maximum speed recorded while the truck is loaded.
Loaded max speed time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred.
Empty max speed km/h Maximum speed recorded while the truck is empty.
Empty max speed time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred.
Peak positive frame torque ton-meter Positive frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the clockwise direction as viewed from the
operator’s seat.
Peak frame torque time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display.
Peak negative frame torque ton-meter Negative frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the counter-clockwise direction as viewed
from the operator's seat.
Peak frame torque time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display.
Peak sprung load tons Peak dynamic load calculation.
Peak sprung load time seconds Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak instantaneous load calculation.
Front-left tire-ton-km/h t-km/h Tire ton-km/h for haul cycle.
Front-right tire-ton-km/h t-km/h Tire ton-km/h for haul cycle.
Average rear tire-ton-km/h t-km/h Tire ton-km/h for haul cycle.
Truck Frame Serial Number alpha The truck serial number from the nameplate on the truck frame.
Reserved 1-10 number These values are internal calculations used in the continued development of the PLM III system and
must be ignored.
Page 60-16
Haul Cycle Warning Flags F: Final Zone to Dumping Transition

The payload meter expects haul cycles to progress in This message is generated when the payload meter
a particular way. When something unexpected takes senses a body-up while it is calculating the final pay-
place, the system records a warning flag. Several load indicating that the operator has dumped the
events within the haul cycle can cause a warning flag load. It may also be generated if the body-up signal is
to be generated. Each one indicates an unusual not properly reaching the payload meter and the
occurrence during the haul cycle. They do not neces- weight in the truck falls dramatically while the truck is
sarily indicate a problem with the payload meter or calculating the final payload.
payload calculation.
H: False Body-Up
A: Continuous Loading
This message indicates that the body was raised dur-
This message is generated when the truck is loaded ing the haul cycle without the load being dumped.
over 50% full without the payload meter sensing The body-up signal indicated that the truck was
swingloads. This indicates that a continuous loading dumping, but the weight of the truck did not fall below
operation was used to load the truck. It may also indi- 20% of the rated load.
cate that the payload meter did not receive the brake
lock input while the truck was being loaded. There I: Body-Up Signal Failed
may be a problem with the wiring or the brake lock This message indicates that the load was dumped
was not used. The payload meter will not measure without a body-up signal being received by the pay-
swingloads unless the brake lock is used during the load meter. The weight of the truck fell below 20%,
loading process. but the payload meter did not receive a body-up sig-
nal from the sensor.
B: Loading to Dumping Transition
This message is generated when the payload meter J: Speed Sensor Failed
senses a body-up input during the loading process. This message indicates that the payload meter
This message is usually accompanied by a sensed the truck loading and dumping without
no_final_load flag. receiving a speed signal.
C: No Final Load K: New Tare Not Calculated
This message is generated when the payload meter The payload meter was not able to accurately calcu-
is unable to determine the final payload in the truck. late a new empty sprung weight for the truck to use
Typically, this means that the payload meter as the tare value for the haul cycle. The tare value
switched from a loaded state to the dumping state from the last haul cycle was used to calculate pay-
before the load could be accurately measured. load.
D: Maneuvering to Dumping Transition L: Incomplete Haul Cycle
This message is generated when the payload meter The payload meter did not have proper data to start
senses a body-up input during the maneuvering or the haul cycle with after powering up. When the PLM
repositioning process indicating that the operator has III powers off, it records the data from the haul cycle
dumped the load. It may also be generated if the in progress into memory. This flag indicates that this
body-up signal is not properly reaching the payload data was not recorded the last time the payload
meter and the weight in the truck falls dramatically meter was shut down. This can happen when the
while the truck is maneuvering or repositioning. main battery disconnect is used to shut the truck
down instead of the key switch. A haul cycle with this
E: Average Load or Tare Used
warning flag will not be considered accurate. Haul
This message indicates that the recorded payload cycles with this warning are displayed in red on the
may not be as accurate as a typical final load calcula- payload summary window and are not included in the
tion. Typically, this is recorded when loading begins summary statistics for reports or display.
before an accurate tare is calculated or the load is
dumped before the load can be accurately mea-
sured.
Page 60-17
M: Haul Cycle Too Long Sprung Weight Data
The haul_cycle_too_long flag indicates that the haul The payload meter is constantly monitoring the live
cycle took longer than 18.2 hours to complete. The payload calculation. This value naturally rises and
times stored for particular events may not be accu- falls for a loaded truck depending on road and driving
rate. This does not affect the payload calculation. conditions. The payload meter records the top five
highest payload calculations and the time they
N: Sensor Input Error occurred. This information is stored in permanent
An alarm was set for one of the five critical sensor memory inside the meter.
inputs during the haul cycle. The five critical sensors
Maximum Speed Data
are the four pressure sensors and the inclinometer.
Without these inputs, the payload meter cannot cal- The payload meter records the top five highest
culate payload. A haul cycle with this warning flag will speeds and the time they occurred. This information
not be considered accurate. Haul cycles with this is stored in permanent memory inside the meter.
warning are displayed in red on the payload sum-
mary window and are not included in the summary Alarm Records
statistics for reports or display. The payload meter stores alarm records to give ser-
vice personnel a working history of the system. All
Frame Torque Data
codes are viewed using the PC connected to the
Payload meter records the top five peak positive and payload meter. Active codes are also displayed on
negative frame torque values and the time they the two-digit display on the meter itself. Each code
occurred. The frame torque is a measure of the twist- has a specific cause and will lead to an investigation
ing action along the centerline of the truck. Positive for correction. Some failures can be overcome by the
frame torque is measured when the suspension payload meter. Haul cycle data will indicate if an
forces on the front of the truck act to twist the frame alarm condition was present during the cycle. Fail-
in the clockwise direction as viewed from the opera- ures with the suspension or inclinometer sensors
tor's seat. Negative frame torque is measured when cannot be overcome.
the forces from the suspensions act in the opposite
direction.
For example, if the left front and right rear pressure
rises as the right front and left rear pressure drops,
the truck frame experiences a twisting motion along
the longitudinal centerline. In this case, the payload
meter will record a positive frame torque.
The five highest values in the positive and negative
direction are stored in permanent memory within the
payload meter.
Page 60-18
Fault Code Data
Table 2:
Fault Code Name Description
1 Left front pressure high Input current > 22 ma
2 Left front pressure low Input current < 2 ma
3 Right front pressure high Input current > 22 ma
4 Right front pressure low Input current < 2 ma
5 Left rear pressure high Input current > 22 ma
6 Left rear pressure low Input current < 2 ma
7 Right rear pressure high Input current > 22 ma
8 Right rear pressure low Input current < 2 ma
9 Inclinometer high Input voltage < 0.565 VDC
10 Inclinometer low Input voltage > 5.08 VDC
11 Speed input failure Not Used.
12 Brake lock input failure Not Used.
13 Body-up input failure Payload meter detected dumping activity without receiving a body-up signal.
16 Memory write failure Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
17 Memory read failure Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
18 Rear right suspension flat Payload meter detected an undercharged suspension condition on the rear right suspension.
19 Rear left suspension flat Payload meter detected an undercharged suspension condition on the rear left suspension.
20 Time change Payload meter time was changed by more than 10 minutes. The Alarm Set time indicates
original time. The Alarm Clear time indicates the new time.
21 Tare value reset The user manually forced the payload meter to reset the haul cycle empty (tare) sprung
weight. This forced the meter into the tare_zone state and lost all data for the previous haul
cycle.
22 Excessive carryback The payload meter detected an empty carryback load in excess of the user-defined carryback
threshold on two consecutive haul cycles.
26 User switch fault - SELECT Select switch on for more than two minutes may indicate short to ground.
27 User switch fault - SET Set switch on for more than two minutes may indicate short to ground.
Page 60-19
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Installing the PLM III Software

The CD ROM containing the Payload Data Manage-
PC Overview
ment (PDM) Software will automatically begin instal-
The PC software has several basic functions: lation when it is inserted into the drive on the PC. If
this does not happen, the software can be installed
• Configure the PLM III system on the truck
by running the Setup.exe program on the CD ROM.
• Troubleshoot and check the PLM III system
The minimum PC requirements for running the soft-
• Download data from the PLM III system ware is a Pentium 133Mhz with 64 MB of ram and at
• Analyze data from the payload systems least 300 MB of free hard drive space available. For
improved performance, the recommended PC would
Configuration, troubleshooting, and downloading be a Celeron, AMD K6-2 or better processor with 128
require a serial connection to the payload meter on MB of ram running at 400 Mhz. The PDM software
the truck. Analysis can be done at any time without a uses a powerful database to manipulate the large
connection to the payload meter. amounts of data gathered from the PLM III system.
Payload data is downloaded from several trucks into Using a more powerful computer and added memory
one database on the PC. The database can be que- to run the software can result in a significant
ried to look at the entire fleet, one truck or truck improvement in performance. The software is written
model. The data can be graphed, reported, imported, to use a minimum 800x600 screen resolution.
or exported. The export feature can take payload
data and save it in a format that spreadsheet pro-
grams like Excel or word processing programs can
easily import.
System Configuration
PLM III needs to be configured for operation when it
is first installed on the truck. This process requires
several steps and uses the laptop computer to make
the necessary settings. The setup procedure can be
broken down into several steps:
• Connecting the laptop to the PLM III system
• Starting communications
• Setting the time and date
• Setting the truck type
• Setting the truck ID
• Setting the speedometer/display gauge units
Page 60-20
DOWNLOADING DATA To download the payload meter:

PLM III records many types of data. The PLM III PC 1. Connect to the payload meter and start the PC
software is designed to download the data from a software.
whole truck fleet. Instead of creating one data file for 2. From the main menu, select “Connect to Pay-
each truck, the PC software combines all the data load Meter". The PC will request the latest sta-
from many trucks into one database on the hard tus information from the payload meter. The
drive of the computer. The software then allows number of haul cycles and alarms will be dis-
users to query the database to create custom reports played.
and graphs. Data for individual trucks or groups of 3. Select the "Begin Download" button. The PC
trucks can be easily analyzed. This same data can will request the payload and alarm data from
be exported for use in other software applications like the payload meter and save it into the data-
word processors and spreadsheet applications. base. This may take several minutes. A
As the database grows, performance of the PC soft- progress bar at the bottom will show the
ware for analysis will slow down. It may be helpful to approximate time left.
periodically export data. For example, query the
database to show the oldest quarter, month, or half
year and print out a summary report. Then export the
data to a compressed format and save the file in a
secure location. Once the data is exported, delete
the entire query results from the database. If neces-
sary, the data can easily be imported back into the
main database for analysis at a future date. Remov-
ing this older data will improve performance.
The PC software downloads the data from the pay-

load meter into a single Paradox database. The data
from all the trucks is added to the same database.
Downloading the payload meter can take several
minutes. The data is added to the database on the
laptop used to download.
To move the data to another computer, a query must
be run to isolate the particular data for export. DO
NOT press the operator switch on the dashboard
while downloading.
Page 60-21
PLM III SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Short Tons: Payload is displayed in short tons, dis-
tances and speeds will be displayed in Miles.
Starting Communications
Metric Tons: Payload is displayed in metric tons, dis-
The PDM software allows users to download and tances and speeds are displayed in Kilometers.
configure the system.
Long Tons: Payload is displayed in long tons, dis-
tances and speeds are displayed in Miles.
Time Units
Minutes and seconds example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5:32
Decimal minutes example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5.53
Connection Menu
Before connecting to the payload meter, select

"Change Program Options" and confirm that the pro-
gram has selected the correct laptop serial port. Most
laptops use Comm 1 for serial communications. The
units displayed for reports and graphs by the PC soft-
ware can be set on this form. Click “Done” to return
to the main menu.
The connection screen displays basic system infor-

mation to the user.
• Frame S/N must agree with the truck serial number
from the serial plate located on the truck frame.
• Truck number is an ID number assigned to the
truck by the mine.
• The payload meter date/time values come from
the payload meter at the moment of connection.
From the main menu, click the "Connect to Payload • Number of haul cycle records is the number of
Meter" button. The PC will try to connect to the pay- haul cycles records stored in memory and
load meter and request basic information from the available for download.
system. In the event of communications trouble, the • Number of active alarms shows how many
PC will try three times to connect before timing-out. alarms are currently active in the system at the
This may take several seconds. time of connection. If there are active alarms, the
"Display Active Alarms" button is available.
Displayed Payload Units
• Number of inactive alarms shows how many
Three options are available for the display of units in alarms have been recorded in memory and are
the PC software, reports, and graphs: available for download.
• PLM software version displays the current
version of software in the payload meter.
The information on the connection menu comes from
the configuration of the payload system on the truck.
Page 60-22
There are also many configuration and download Setting the Date and Time
options available from this screen. The connection
menu is updated only when the connection is first
made. It does not update automatically. To view
changes made while connected, the user must close
the window and reconnect to the payload meter.
The connection menu is displayed after a serial con-
The time shown on the form is the time transmitted
nection has been established and the PC software
from the payload when the connection was first
has connected to the payload meter.
established.
Connecting to the Payload Meter
Communications to the PLM III requires a laptop
computer running the PDM software. The software
connects to the payload meter through the meter's
serial port #1. This is the same port used by the
speedometer/display gauge. When the laptop is
using the serial port, the lower display on the opera-
tor gauge on the dashboard will be blank. This does
not affect the operation of the speedometer.
The date and time are maintained by a special chip
• Connect the laptop to the system using the on the PLM III circuit board. The memory for this chip
EF9160 communications harness. The download is maintained by a very large capacitor when the
connector is typically located on the housing power is removed from the payload meter. This will
mounted in the cab to the back wall. The PLM III maintain the date and time settings for approximately
system uses the same connection as the
30 days. After this time, it is possible for the payload
Payload Meter II system.
meter to lose the date and time setting. It is recom-
Configure the Payload Meter mended that the system be powered every 20 days
to maintain the date and time. If the date and time is
Configuration of the payload meter requires a serial lost, simply reset the information using this proce-
connection to the PLM III system. Clicking the "Con- dure. It takes approximately 90 minutes to recharge
figure Payload Meter" button will bring up the truck the capacitor.
configuration screen and menu. This screen displays
the latest configuration information stored on the Changing the date and time will affect the haul cycle
payload meter. in progress and may produce unexpected results in
the statistical information for that one haul cycle.
When changes are made to the configuration, the
"Save Changes" button must be pressed to save the To change the time:
changes into the payload meter. To confirm the 1. Click on the digit that needs to be changed.
changes, exit to the main menu and re-connect to the
2. Use the up/down arrows to change or type in
payload meter.
the correct value.
3. Press the "Save Changes" button to save the
new time in the payload meter.
To change the date:
1. Click on the digit that needs to be changed.
2. Type in the correct value or use the pull-down
calendar to select a date.
3. Press the "Save Changes" button to save the
new time in the payload meter.
Page 60-23
Setting the Truck Type Setting the Truck Number
Most mining operations assign a number to each
piece of equipment for quick identification. This num-
ber or name can be entered in the truck number field.
It is very important to enter a unique truck number for
1. From the truck configuration screen, use the
each truck using the PLM III system. This number is
pull-down menu to select the truck type that the
one of the key fields used within the haul cycle data-
payload meter is installed on.
base. The field will hold 20 alpha-numeric charac-
2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program ters.
the change into the meter.
1. On the truck configuration screen, enter the
Setting the Gauge Display Units truck number in the appropriate field.
The payload meter speedometer/display gauge dis- 2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program
plays the speed on the upper display. The units for the change into the payload meter.
the speed display are selected using a jumper on the
Setting the Komatsu Distributor
rear of the case.
This field in the haul cycle record can hold the name
The payload units on the lower display can be
of the Komatsu distributor that helped install the sys-
changed from metric to short tons or long tons using
tem. Komatsu also assigns a distributor number to
the truck configuration screen. This selection also
each distributor. This number is used on all warranty
switches between metric (kg/cm2) and psi (lbs/in2) claims. This Komatsu distributor number can also be
for the live display of pressure on the gauge. put into this field. The field will hold 20 alpha-numeric
1. From the truck configuration screen, select the characters.
payload units to be used on the lower display of 1. On the truck configuration screen, enter the dis-
the speedometer/display gauge. tributor name or number in the appropriate field.
2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program 2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program
the change into the payload meter. the change into the payload meter.
Setting the Frame Serial Number Setting the Komatsu Customer
This field in the haul cycle record can hold the name
of the mine or operation where the truck is in service.
Komatsu also assigns a customer number to each
customer. This number is used on all warranty
claims. This Komatsu customer number can also be
put into this field. The field will hold 20 alpha-numeric
characters.
The frame serial number is located on the plate 1. On the truck configuration screen, enter the
mounted to the truck frame. The plate is outboard on customer name or number in the appropriate
the lower right rail facing the right front tire. It is very field.
important to enter the correct frame serial number.
This number is one of the key fields used within the 2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program
haul cycle database. The field will hold 20 alpha- the change into the payload meter.
numeric characters.
1. On the Truck Configuration screen, enter the
truck frame serial number in the appropriate
field.
2. Press the "Save Changes" button to program
the change into the payload meter.
Page 60-24
Clean Truck Tare Inclinometer Calibration
The payload meter uses the clean truck tare value to

The inclinometer calibration procedure is designed to
calculate carry-back load for each haul cycle. The
compensate for variations in the mounting attitude of
carry-back stored in the haul cycle record is the new
the inclinometer. The inclinometer input is critical to
empty tare minus the clean truck tare.
the payload calculation.
This procedure must be performed after service to
This procedure must be performed on relatively flat
the suspensions or when significant changes are
ground. Often the maintenance area is an ideal loca-
made to the sprung weight of the truck. Before per-
tion for this procedure.
forming this procedure, ensure the suspensions are
properly filled with oil and charged. It is critical to pay- 1. After cleaning debris from the truck and check-
load measurement that the proper oil height and gas ing to see that the suspensions are properly
pressure be used. serviced, use the PLM III software to connect to
the payload meter.
Once the clean tare process is started, the payload
meter will begin to calculate the clean, empty sprung 2. From the "Truck Configuration" screen, select
weight of the truck. This calculation continues while "Inclinometer".
the truck drives to the next loading site. Once the 3. With the truck stopped and the brake lock on,
procedure is started, there is no reason to continue press the “Start” button. This instructs the pay-
to monitor the process with the PC. The truck does load meter to sample the inclinometer once.
not need to be moving to start this procedure. 4. Turn the truck around. Drive the truck around
1. After cleaning debris from the truck and check- and park in the exact same spot as before, fac-
ing to see that the suspensions are properly ing the other direction.
serviced, use the PLM III software to connect to 5. With the truck stopped and the brake lock on,
the payload meter. press the “Start” button. This instructs the pay-
2. From the "Truck Configuration" screen, select load meter to sample the inclinometer again.
"Clean Truck Tare". The payload meter will average the two sam-
ples to determine the average offset.
3. Follow the screen instructions.
6. Follow the screen instructions.
Page 60-25
DATA ANALYSIS
PAYLOAD SUMMARY FORM
The data analysis tools allow the user to monitor the Sorting on Truck Unit Number
performance of the payload systems across the fleet.
The truck unit number is the truck unit number
Analysis begins when the "View Payload Data" but-
entered into the payload meter when it was config-
ton is pressed. This starts an all trucks, all dates, all
ured at installation. The query can be set to look for
times query of the database and displays the results
all trucks or one particular truck number. When the
in the payload summary form.
program begins, it searches through the database for
The user can change the query by changing the all the unique truck numbers and creates a list to
dates, times, or trucks to include in the query for dis- select from.
play.
Choosing one particular truck number will limit the
Haul cycles in the data grid box at the bottom can be data in the displays, summaries, and reports to the
double-clicked to display the detailed results of that one selected truck. To create reports for truck num-
haul. ber 374, select 374 from the pull-down menu and hit
the "Query Database and Display" button.
Creating a Query
Sorting on Truck Type
The program defaults to show all trucks, all types, all
dates, and all times for the initial query. The display The truck type is the size of the truck from the family
can be narrowed by selecting which trucks or types of Komatsu trucks. This allows the user to quickly
to view and for what dates and times. view results from different types of trucks on the
property. For example, a separate report can be gen-
The query items are added in the AND condition. If
erated for 830E and 930E trucks.
the user selects a truck # and date range, the query
will sort the data for that truck number and the date
range.
Page 60-26
Sorting on Date Range 2. Change the From date to January 5, 2000.

The default query starts in 1995 and runs through the
current date on the PC. To narrow the range to a
specific date, change the From and To dates.
For example, to view the haul cycle reports from
truck 374 for the month of July, 2000:
1. Select truck 374 from the truck unit pull-down

menu.
3. Change the To date to January 8, 2000.
4. Change the From time to 06:00.
5. Change the To time to 18:00.
6. Press the "Query Database and Display" to

view the results.
2. Change the From date to July 1, 2000. This query will display haul cycles from January 5 to
January 8, from 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM.
Date
Time
Jan 5, 2000 Jan 6, 2000 Jan 7, 2000 Jan 8, 2000 Jan 9, 2000
0:00
6:00
3. Change the To date to July 31, 2000.

12:00
4. Press the "Query Database and Display" to
view the results.
Sorting on Time Range 18:00
The time range sorts the times of the day for valid
dates. Changing the time range to 6:00 AM to 6:00
PM will limit the payloads displayed to the loads that 24:00
occurred between those times for each day of the Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00
Haul Cycles Included in the Query
date range. Times are entered in 24:00 format. To Daily Shift Time: 6:00 to 18:00
view the haul cycle reports from the first shift for truck
374 from January 5, 2000 to January 8, 2000: The shift times selected can extend the query past
the original date. If the dates set for the query are
1. Select truck 374 from the truck unit pull-down
January 5 to January 8 and the times were changed
menu.
to query the 6:00 PM (18:00) to 6:00 AM (06:00) shift,
the results would extend into the morning of the 9th.
This can been seen in the following example:
Page 60-27
Creating Reports
Time
Date
Reports can be generated and viewed on the screen
0:00
Jan 5, 2000 Jan 6, 2000 Jan 7, 2000 Jan 8, 2000 Jan 9, 2000
or printed. These reports are generated from the
query displayed on the payload summary screen.
From the example in Sorting on Time Range, the
report printed would only contain data from truck 374
6:00
during the month of July 2000, from 8:00 AM to 5:00
PM.
It is important to carefully select the query data and
12:00
press the "Query Database & Display" button before
printing a report.
18:00
24:00
Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00

Haul Cycles Included in the Query
Daily Shift Time: 18:00 to 6:00
Payload Detail Screen

The payload detail screen gives the details for any
individual haul cycle. From the “Payload Summary”
screen, double-click on any haul cycle to display the
detail.
Page 60-28
NOTE: Some haul cycles may contain the sensor

input warning flag. This indicates that one of the four
pressure sensors or inclinometer was not functioning
properly during the haul cycle. Haul cycles with this
warning are displayed in red on the payload
summary window and are not included in the
summary statistics for reports or display.
Summary - One Page Report

A summary of the queried data can be printed onto
one page. The cycle data is summarized onto one
sheet. Displayed is the speeds, cycle times, load sta-
tistics, frame, and tire data.
Detailed - Multi-Page Report

The detail report starts with the summary report and
follows with pages of data for each haul cycle. The
detailed report prints date, time, payload, cycle
times, and cycle distances, speeds, and the number
of swing loads.
Page 60-29
Creating Graphs Exporting Data
The PLM III software can generate graphs that
quickly summarize payload data. These graphs can
be customized for printing. Just like the reports, the
graphs are generated from the query displayed on
the payload summary screen. From the Sorting on
Time Range example, the graph that is printed would
only contain data from truck 374 during the month of
July 2000, from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.
It is important to carefully select the query data and
press the "Query Database & Display" button before
creating a graph.
The data from the database can be exported for use
1. From the payload summary screen select the with other software applications. The data is selected
“Graph” button at the bottom. The “Histogram from the currently displayed query. The exported
Setup” screen will display data can be put into a .CSV file or a compressed .zip
file.
• The .CSV format allows data to be easily
imported into spreadsheet applications and word
processing applications.
• The .Zip format allows data to be transferred from
one computer to the PDM software database on
another computer. This offers a compact way to
transfer data from one computer to another.
CSV Export
2. Enter the lowest value. This will be the lowest

payload on the graph. Any payloads less than
this value will be summed in the first bar.
3. Enter the highest value. This will be the highest
value on the graph. Payloads over this value
will be summed in the last bar.
4. Enter the incremental change. This will deter- CSV stands for Comma Separated Value. This is an
mine the number of bars and the distance ASCII text file format that allows spreadsheet appli-
between them. The program limits the number cations like Excel and Lotus 123 to import data eas-
of bars to 20. This allows graphs to fit on the ily. To export the data into a .csv file, press the
screen and print onto one page. "Export" button at the bottom of the payload sum-
mary screen and select "To CSV". The program will
5. Press the “Create Graph” button.
request a filename and location for the file.
The graph will be displayed based on the query set-
tings from the payload summary screen. The graph
can be customized and printed.
Page 60-30
. • Maximum - frame torque

• Time when the maximum - frame torque occurred
• Maximum sprung weight calculation
• Time when the maximum sprung weight
calculation occurred
• Left front tire-kilometer-hour
• Right front tire-kilometer-hour
• Average rear tire-kilometer-hour
• Frame serial number
• Reserved 1-5, 7-10: These values are internal
calculations used in the continued development
of PLM III and must be ignored.
Two sets of data are exported. At the top of the file • Reserved 6: This value is the payload estimate at
will be the haul cycle data. The columns, left to right, the shovel just before the truck begins to move.
are:
• Truck number
• Haul cycle start date
• Haul cycle start time
• Payload
• Swingloads
• Operator ID
• Warning flags
• Carry back
• Total haul cycle time
• Empty running time The second series of data below the haul cycle data
• Empty stop time is the alarms. The alarm columns, left to right, are:
• Loading time • The alarm type
• Loaded running time • The date the alarm was set
• Loaded stopped time • The time the alarm was set
• Dumping time • Alarm description
• Loading start time • The date the alarm was cleared
• Dumping start time • The time the alarm was cleared
• Loaded haul distance
• Empty haul distance
• Loaded maximum speed
• Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
• Empty maximum speed
• Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
• Maximum + frame torque
• Time when the maximum + frame torque
occurred
Page 60-31
Compressed Deleting Haul Cycle Records
To delete haul cycle records from the main database,
press the "Delete" button at the bottom of the pay-
load summary screen. The program will display a
summary of the records from the displayed query. To
delete a record, select one at a time and press the
"Delete" button. It is recommended that records be
exported to a zip file for archival purposes before
deletion. Multiple records may be selected by holding
down the shift key. Pressing the "Delete All" button
will select all the records from the current query and
delete them.
This export function allows the data from one laptop
to be transferred to another computer. This can be
useful when a service laptop is used to download NOTE: There is no recovery for records that have
multiple machines and transfer the data to a central been deleted from the main database. It is highly
computer for analysis. This can also be used to copy recommended that all records be exported and
haul data from a particular truck onto a diskette for archived in a compressed file format for future
analysis. reference before being deleted.
The file format is a compressed binary form of the
displayed query. The file can only be imported by
another computer running the PDM software.
To export data in ZIP format:
1. Confirm that the data displayed is the query
data that needs to be exported.
2. From the payload summary screen, press the
"EXPORT" button and select "To ZIP".
3. The program will ask for a filename and loca-
tion.
Importing Data
This import function allows the data from one laptop
to be transferred to another computer. This can be
useful when a service laptop is used to download
multiple machines and transfer the data to a central
computer for analysis. This can also be used to copy
haul data from a particular truck from a diskette into a
database for analysis.
To import data, press the "IMPORT" button at the
bottom of the payload summary screen. The program
will ask for a .zip file to import, locate the file and
press "Open". The program will only import .zip files
created by another computer running the PDM soft-
ware.
Page 60-32
Viewing Alarms Deleting Alarm Records

From the payload summary screen, click the To delete alarm records from the main database,
“Alarms” button to display the alarm screen. The press the "Delete" button at the bottom of the alarm
alarms are sorted by the query settings from the pay- display screen. The program will display a summary
load summary screen. Alarms can be displayed as of the alarms from the query. To delete an alarm,
active or inactive. select one at a time and press the "Delete" button. It
is recommended that the query data be exported to a
.zip file for archival purposes before deletion. Multiple
records may be selected by holding down the shift
key. Pressing the "Delete All" button will select all the
alarms from the current query and delete them.
NOTE: There is no recovery for alarms that have

been deleted from the main database. It is highly
recommended that all records be exported and
archived in a compressed file format for future
reference before being deleted.
PORTIONS OF THIS PRODUCT RELATING TO PAYLOAD MEASURING SYSTEMS ARE

MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE F ROM
L.G. HAGENBUCH holder of

U.S. Patent Numbers 4,831,539 and 4,839,835
OM7004 4/05 Radio / Cassette Player - Section 70
Page 70-1
RADIO / CASSETTE PLAYER
FIGURE 70-1. RADIO / CASSETTE PLAYER
GENERAL RECEIVER FUNCTIONS Setting The Default Display
Turning The Power On And Off 1. Press and hold DSPL/TM (9) for two seconds
until the hour digits flash.
1. Turn the key switch to ON.
2. Press push-button 6/FF (15) to change the
2. Press PWR (1, Figure 70-1) to turn the receiver default display.
on and off. Pushing ON/AUDIO (6) also turns After five seconds of inactivity has elapsed, the
the receiver power on. selected default will display.
Display
With the receiver off, the clock will be displayed. Adjusting Display Brightness
Momentarily pressing DSP/TM SET (9) with the 1. Press and hold DIM (14) until DIM appears on
receiver on will allow the operator to toggle between the display.
displays.
2. Rotate ON/AUDIO knob (6) clockwise or coun-
• When the receiver is in AM, FM1, FM2, or WX, terclockwise until the desired brightness is
the display will toggle between the frequency and obtained.
the clock.
• When the receiver is in an active satellite mode
and the provider is transmitting the available
information, the display will toggle between the
clock, frequency, station name, artist, song title
and music type.
• When the receiver is in the cassette mode, the
display will toggle between TP SIDE 1 or TP
SIDE 2, and the clock.
Radio / Cassette Player - Section 70 OM7004 4/05
Page 70-2
SETTING THE TIME SEEK Mode

1. Turn the key switch ON.
Hold either the TUNE or SEEK buttons for more
2. Press and hold DSPL/TM SET (9, Figure 70-1) than 0.5 seconds to enter the seek mode. SEEK will
for two seconds. When the number display appear on the display when this mode is activated. In
flashes, time set mode is active. this mode, the radio will scroll through stations and
3. Press TUNE / SEEK (7 & 8) to change the stop on the next station with a strong signal.
hour setting. NOTE: If the receiver can not find a strong enough
4. Press the DSPL/TM button to switch to minutes. signal after two band cycles, the seek mode will
The minute digits will flash when in this mode. discontinue and the receiver will return to the initial
starting point.
5. Press TUNE / SEEK to change the minute
setting. When in satellite mode, press TUNE or SEEK to
navigate through the channels. Pressing and holding
After five seconds of inactivity, the display will return either of the two buttons for more than two seconds
to the default mode. The clock will now display the will increase the cycle speed through the channels.
correct time of day. The increase cycle speed is approximately 10 chan-
nels per second.
SCAN
OPERATING THE RADIO
Press SCAN button (10) to scan all stations on the
BAND current band. When a strong frequency is found, the
Press BAND (2, Figure 70-1) to switch between FM1, receiver will pause on that station for about five sec-
FM2, AM, and WX Weather (US) and Satellite (XM1, onds and then continue scanning. Scan will appear
XM2 or SR1, SR2). If a separate satellite receiver is on the display along with the frequency when this
not connected to your radio and operational, the sat- mode is active. To stop scanning, press the SCAN
ellite bands will not appear in the display. button again.
AUTO
TUNE/SEEK
AUTO (12) allows the receiver to store the six stron-
TUNE (7) / SEEK (8) allows you to move up or gest stations onto push-buttons 1 through 6. Press
down in frequency to other stations. There are two AUTO until AUTO and AS appear on the display. The
modes of operation for finding other stations, manual presets on the current band only will now be pro-
tuning and seek mode. grammed with the six strongest frequencies. Presets
on the other inactive bands will not be changed.
Press and hold both TUNE (8) and BAND (2) for Pressing AUTO again will delete the stations and
two seconds to toggle between the two modes. The default to the original preset stations.
display will read either MANUAL or SEEK to indicate
the mode the receiver is in. NOTE: The AUTO function is not functional on the
satellite band.
Manual Tuning
Press TUNE (8) to tune to the next higher fre-

quency. Press SEEK (7) to tune to the next lower
frequency. Holding either of the buttons for more
than 0.5 seconds will activate fast tuning for
increased speed.
When in satellite mode, press and release either the
TUNE or the SEEK buttons to navigate to the
next channel. Pressing and holding either of the two
buttons for more than 0.5 seconds will increase the
cycle speed through the channels. The increase
cycle speed is approximately 10 channels per sec-
ond.
Page 70-3
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER SETTINGS OPERATION OF THE WEATHERBAND

VOLUME: Rotate ON/AUDIO (6, Figure 70-1) knob
(U.S.)
clockwise to increase the volume and counter-clock- NOAA - weather radio is a service of the National
wise to decrease the volume. VOL will be displayed Weather Service. It provides continuous broadcasts
along with the volume level. of the latest weather information directly from the
National Weather Service offices. Taped weather
BASS: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob until
messages are repeated every four to six minutes and
BASS and the current bass level is displayed. Rotate
are routinely revised every one to three hours, or
the knob clockwise to increase the bass and counter-
more frequently if needed. Most of the stations oper-
clockwise to decrease the bass.
ate 24 hours, daily.
TREBLE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob until
The weather for the area you are in may be found on
TREB and the current treble level is displayed.
one of seven stations. When in the Weatherband
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the treble and
mode, the display will show the WX icon and CHAN #
counter-clockwise to decrease the treble.
to indicate the channel. The channel may be
FADE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob until adjusted through the TUNE /SEEK buttons, and
FADE and the current level is displayed. Rotate the may be preset as in the radio mode.
knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speak- The frequency associated with each channel is as
ers and counter-clockwise to move the sound to the follows:
rear speakers.
BALANCE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob 1. 162.550 MHz 5. 162.450 MHz
until BAL and the present level is displayed. Rotate 2. 162.400 MHz 6. 162.500 MHz
the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right 3. 162.475 MHz 7. 162.525 MHz
speakers and counter-clockwise to move the sound 4. 162.425 MHz
to the left speakers.
SPEAKER: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob
until SPKR and the current setting is displayed. The National Weather Service operates approxi-
Rotate the ON/AUDIO knob to select two-speaker or mately 372 stations. Close to 90 percent of the
four-speaker operation. With two-speaker operation nation's population is within the listening range of a
active, the rear speakers are muted and the FADE NOAA weather radio broadcast.
option will not appear on the menu.
PROGRAMMING PRESET STATIONS

Presets are stations that are stored on each of the 6
push-buttons. After a station has been programmed
into one of the preset buttons, pushing the preset
provides a quick return to that station. The six but-
tons can each store a preset channel per band.
NOTE: The receiver is equipped with two FM radio
bands: FM1 and FM2. The two bands are identical.
However, each one allows the operator to set 6
preset channels for a total of 12 FM presets.
Perform the following steps to program the presets:

1. Turn the receiver on.
2. Select the band and the desired station.
3. Press and hold one of the six push-buttons for
at least two seconds. During this period,
receiver output will be muted and the push-but-
ton number will not show on the display. When
the station has been committed to memory, the
audio and the preset icon will return.
Page 70-4
SATELLITE RADIO Operating Satellite Radio

To use the satellite radio function on your radio, a 1. Use the BAND button to select the proper satel-
subscription must be ordered from a provider. There lite radio band. (XM1, XM2, SR1, SR2)
are currently two providers in the U.S.: XM and Sirius
2. Use the TUNE and SEEK buttons to navi-
Satellite Radio. When a subscription is ordered, you
gate through the channels.
will need to get an additional receiver and antenna
from your provider.
To activate the external satellite receiver, you must Program Type Search (PTY)
supply the provider with your Electronic Serial Num-
ber (ESN). To find the ESN, first install the satellite XM and Sirius both allow you to search by music
receiver per the instructions from the your provider. type. Program Type Search (PTY) allows you to per-
Next, follow the instructions below. form a music search by type. Perform the following
steps in order to do a PTY search.
XM Satellite Radio:
1. Turn both the radio and the satellite receiver on.
Press the BAND button on the radio and select 1. Press SCAN and push-button 1 at the same
either XM1 or XM2. time. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Tune your satellite receiver to channel 0 to see 2. Continue to press push-button 1 until the
the ESN display. desired genre of programming is displayed.
Record the ESN. 3. Once the desired genre has been selected,
press the TUNE and SEEK buttons to scroll
The display will return to the default setting after through the different channels in that genre.
five seconds. Station names will appear on the display as
Sirius Satellite Radio: your scroll.
1. Turn the radio on and with the display showing You may also scan through the channels using
the clock, press and hold the DSPL/TM SET the scan feature. Press the SCAN button to
button until the hours segment is flashing. begin scanning the channels. Press the SCAN
2. Press the BAND button and the ESN will be dis- button again to stop at the desired channel.
played.
Record the ESN.
The display will return to the default setting after
five seconds.
NOTE: Only one satellite receiver can be installed

and connected to your receiver at one time.
Obstructions in the satellite signal may impair your
satellite radio reception. Contact your provider for
satellite radio reception problems.
Page 70-5
CASSETTE PLAYER Cassette Functions

The cassette player that the radio is equipped with The 4/REV button (17) rewinds the cassette. The
works best with cassettes that range from 30 to 90 cassette will continue to rewind until the button is
minutes long. Cassettes that are longer than 90 min- pressed again, or until the cassette reaches the end
utes have thinner tape, and do not work well in this of the tape. <REW will appear on the display as the
model cassette player. cassette is rewinding.
It is also important to only use cassettes that are in The 6/FF button (15) fast forwards the cassette. The
good condition. Cassettes that are dirty, damaged, or cassette will continue to fast forward until the button
have been exposed to excessive heat and/or sunlight is pressed again, or until the cassette reaches the
could cause damage to the cassette player and pos- end of the tape. FWD> will appear on the display as
sible failure. the cassette is fast forwarding.
The cassette player is equipped with automatic
equalization and metal tape sensing functions. An M Press Eject (5) to remove the cassette from the
will appear on the display when a metal tape is player. When the eject button is held, it acts as a stop
sensed. button.
Cleaning the cassette player is a recommended
maintenance item. Clean the player at 35 hour (cas- The button (4) causes the cassette player to
sette play) intervals. Failure to clean the cassette reverse directions and play the opposite side of the
player may diminish sound quality and cause cas- cassette. Pressing the button a second time will
sette player failure. reverse the cassette back to the original side.
NOTE: The cassette will automatically flip to the
opposite side when the end of the tape is reached.
Playing A Cassette
1. Turn the receiver ON.
2. Insert a cassette into the player. The cassette Programmable Eject Default
icon will appear on the display. The tape will
The cassette player has been pre-programmed to
begin to play when the icon appears.
return to the radio after a tape has been ejected. This
Press button (3, Figure 70-1) to change default may be changed to an “eject audio mute”
from the radio to a cassette. TP SIDE 1 or TP mode. This mode will mute the radio after a cassette
SIDE 2 will appear on the display depending on has been ejected. When this occurs, “NO TAPE” will
which side of the cassette is currently being appear on the display and the radio will remain
played. If a cassette is not loaded in the player, muted until BAND (2) is pressed. Pressing this button
NO TAPE will appear on the display. will enable the radio.
NOTE: A tape may be inserted when the receiver is Perform the following steps to change the eject
off by pressing the eject button and inserting the tape default mode:
within 25 seconds. 1. Press and hold DSP/TM SET (9, Figure 70-1)
for at least 2 seconds until the hour digits flash.
2. Press button (3) to toggle between

“P.PLAY” and “EJMUTE”. After five seconds of
inactivity, the receiver will return to the default
display.
Page 70-6
Bad Tape Detect Cleaning The Cassette Player

If the receiver detects a bad cassette, “BAD TAPE” After 35 hours of cassette play, the display will read
will appear on the display and the tape will be TP CLEAN for five seconds. This indicates that it is
ejected. If this occurs, remove the cassette from the time to clean the cassette player.
player and do not re-insert. 1. Turn key switch to ON and turn off receiver.
The bad tape detector must be turned off to use a 2. Disable BAD TAPE DETECT mode. Press and
cleaning tape or a CD adapter in the cassette player.
Perform the following steps to disable this mode: hold button (3, Figure 70-1) for five sec-
onds. “BAD TAPE DETECT OFF” will appear
1. Turn off receiver and turn key switch to OFF. on the display. When this is displayed, the
detector has been disabled.
2. Press and hold button (3) for five seconds.
“BAD TAPE DETECT OFF” will appear on the 3. Turn the receiver on.
display. When this is displayed, the detector 4. Insert a wet-type, non-abrasive, scrubbing cas-
has been disabled. sette cleaner. Follow the instructions provided
with the cleaner.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate the bad
tape detector. “BAD TAPE DETECT ON” will 5. Reset the clean tape timer. With the receiver
appear on the display after the detector has on, press and hold the eject button for five sec-
been activated. onds. TP CLEAN will appear on the display and
the tape icon will flash after three seconds has
elapsed. After five seconds CLN RST will
appear on the display. When this occurs, the
clean tape timer will be reset to zero hours. If
the button was released before CLN RST was
displayed, the timer will not be reset.
®
www.komatsuamerica.com
Komatsu America Corp. Copyright 2006 Komatsu

2300 N.E. Adams Street Peoria, IL 61639 Phone: 309-672-7577 Fax: 309-672-7072 Printed in U.S.A.

CEAM018100

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEAM018100

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEAM018100

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEAM018100

Operation & Maintenance

SERIAL NUMBERS A30427 & UP

Replacement parts manufactured and supplied by unauthorized sources may not be

EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT (APPLIES TO CANADA ONLY)

KOMATSU IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS

ÉNONCÉ DE GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS (APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT):

KOMATSU N’EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES INCIDENTS OU DOMMAGES CONSÉQUENTS.

CEHQ000700 - Komatsu America International Company 12/99

IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION

SYSTÈME DE ENGINE FAMILY DISPLACEMENT LITERS

VITESSE STATIQUE IDLE SPEED RPM FAMILY EMISSION LIMIT

RÉGLAGE DE L’ALLUMAGE - _____________________________________________ KOMATSU LTD.

ENGINE DATAPLATE - ENGLISH / FRENCH

TRUCK MODEL ILLUSTRATION

KOMATSU MODEL 730E DUMP TRUCK

This ALERT symbol is used in this manual, along with

DANGER identifies a specific potential hazard

WARNING identifies a specific potential hazard

CAUTION is used for general reminders

STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 12

GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION 20

Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

Truck Operation - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

Traveling In The Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

Precautions When Traveling In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

Traveling On Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

Ensuring Good Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Operating On Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Avoid Damage To The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Driving Near High-Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

When Loading The Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

When Dumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Working On Loose Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

Parking The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

WORKING NEAR BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

Battery Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

Jump-Starting With Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

Stopping The Engine Before Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

Warning Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

Securing The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

DURING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Working Under The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Keeping The Machine Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Rules To Follow When Adding Fuel Or Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Radiator Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Precautions With The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Handling High-Pressure Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Precautions With High-Pressure Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Maintenance Near High Temperatures And High Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Rotating Fan And Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Waste Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Handling Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12

Tire Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12